WO2024034207A1 - Colony counting device, control method, and program - Google Patents

Colony counting device, control method, and program Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024034207A1
WO2024034207A1 PCT/JP2023/017660 JP2023017660W WO2024034207A1 WO 2024034207 A1 WO2024034207 A1 WO 2024034207A1 JP 2023017660 W JP2023017660 W JP 2023017660W WO 2024034207 A1 WO2024034207 A1 WO 2024034207A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
mcu
image
illumination
inspection
count
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2023/017660
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
松村晋吾
関谷傑
Original Assignee
株式会社キーエンス
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 株式会社キーエンス filed Critical 株式会社キーエンス
Publication of WO2024034207A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024034207A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12M—APPARATUS FOR ENZYMOLOGY OR MICROBIOLOGY; APPARATUS FOR CULTURING MICROORGANISMS FOR PRODUCING BIOMASS, FOR GROWING CELLS OR FOR OBTAINING FERMENTATION OR METABOLIC PRODUCTS, i.e. BIOREACTORS OR FERMENTERS
    • C12M1/00—Apparatus for enzymology or microbiology
    • C12M1/34—Measuring or testing with condition measuring or sensing means, e.g. colony counters
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/02—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving viable microorganisms
    • C12Q1/04—Determining presence or kind of microorganism; Use of selective media for testing antibiotics or bacteriocides; Compositions containing a chemical indicator therefor
    • C12Q1/06—Quantitative determination

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a colony counting device, a control method, and a program.
  • colony counters are used to test whether bacteria are present in the products.
  • the inspector forms a culture medium in a petri dish, puts a food sample into the culture medium, and incubates it in an incubator or the like for a predetermined period of time. Thereafter, the examiner takes out the petri dish from the incubator and counts colonies (bacterial colonies) using a colony counter. In this way, the counting accuracy of colony counters is important for food hygiene control.
  • Patent Document 1 in order to stably catch a large number of colonies of the same type, a plurality of illumination images each having a different illumination direction are acquired, and by comparing the plurality of illumination images, almost all of the colonies on the culture medium can be harvested. It has been proposed to make colonies of
  • halation may occur in an inspection image obtained by photographing a colony.
  • Halation causes blown-out pixels (pixels whose pixel values are saturated to the maximum value) in the inspection image, making it difficult to accurately count colonies. Therefore, an object of the present invention is to improve colony counting accuracy.
  • the present invention provides, for example, an illumination section that illuminates an inspection object by switching the illumination direction, an imaging section that photographs the inspection object illuminated by the illumination section and generates image data, and a lighting section that sequentially changes the illumination direction of the illumination section.
  • a control unit that controls the imaging unit to cause the imaging unit to photograph the inspection individual that has been switched and illuminated by the illumination unit, and to generate a plurality of first image data each having a different illumination direction for the inspection individual;
  • the pixel value of each pixel of the inspection image is set as the pixel value of each pixel of the inspection image.
  • a colony counting device having an image generation unit that determines a pixel value with reduced gloss based on the pixel values of pixels of a plurality of first image data, and a counting unit that counts colonies included in the inspection image. .
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the structure of a head device.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the electrical configuration of a head device.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the electrical configuration of a control device.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a user interface (UI). The figure explaining UI which creates a count table from a sample database.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI related to sample name input assistance. The figure explaining UI which creates a new count table.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI for reusing past count tables.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI that facilitates setting of statistical processing.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI that facilitates setting of statistical processing.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI related to parent-child relationships.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI related to parent-child relationships.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI for adding column elements. The figure explaining UI at the time of an inspection.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI for changing inspection conditions and the like.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI when instructing a count.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a UI when registering count results in a cell.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI that shows automatic identification of a target cell.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI that facilitates setting of statistical processing.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI related to parent-child relationships.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI related to
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI for switching units of count results.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI for switching information displayed in a cell.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI for resetting counting conditions.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the transition of assignment of functions to buttons.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI for changing inspection conditions and the like. The figure explaining the UI which calls the count table created in the past. A diagram explaining an inspection list. A diagram explaining a user authentication tag.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a UI for registering information in a free column cell.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a UI for registering information in a free column cell.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a UI for registering information in a free column cell.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a code (symbol) reading UI.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating symbol decoding results.
  • 5 is a flowchart showing processing executed by a PC.
  • 5 is a flowchart showing processing executed by the head device.
  • a flowchart illustrating identification of a count table. Flowchart explaining how to count colonies.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the arrangement of light emitting elements in a ring lighting device. A diagram illustrating a method for realizing different illumination directions.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating gloss reduction processing.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a count setting UI.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a count setting UI.
  • FIG. 1 shows a colony counting device 1.
  • the colony counting device 1 includes a head device 1a and a control device (personal computer (PC)) 1b, which will be described later.
  • the head device 1a and the PC 1b may be connected by wire using, for example, a universal serial bus (USB) cable, or may be connected wirelessly.
  • USB universal serial bus
  • the head device 1a includes an upper unit 2, a support unit 3, and a lower unit 4.
  • a camera and a lighting device are provided inside the head device 1a.
  • the support unit 3 exists between the upper unit 2 and the lower unit 4 and supports the upper unit 2.
  • a stage 5 is provided on the top surface of the lower unit 4.
  • the stage 5 is provided with a transmission window 6 on which the Petri dish 15 is placed, and a positioning member 7 for positioning the Petri dish 15 at the center of the transmission window 6.
  • An operating section 8 and a front camera 10 are provided on the front of the lower unit 4.
  • the operation unit 8 includes a plurality of switches (eg, a first hardware button 8a, a second hardware button 8b, and a third hardware button 8c) for the user to input instructions.
  • the front camera 10 is optional and reads, for example, two-dimensional symbols (barcodes).
  • the front camera 10 is arranged in a recess 4a provided in the front of the housing of the head device 1.
  • a power switch 9 is provided on the side surface of the lower unit 4.
  • FIG. 2 is a sectional view of the head device 1a.
  • a ring illumination device 12 for providing epi-illumination is arranged near the bottom surface of the upper unit 2.
  • Epi-illumination is an illumination method for observing a test object by receiving light reflected by the test object.
  • a main camera 11 and an optical system 16 are arranged above the ring illumination device 12.
  • a ring illumination device 13 is also arranged below the transmission window 6. Further below the ring illumination device 13, a coaxial illumination device 14 that performs coaxial illumination (total illumination) is arranged.
  • Coaxial illumination objective illumination
  • transmitted illumination is also called transmitted illumination, and is used as a method of observing the test object by receiving light that has passed through the test object.
  • the ring lighting device 12 includes a plurality of light emitting elements 12a arranged in a ring shape and a diffusion plate 12b that diffuses light output from the plurality of light emitting elements 12a. By selecting the light emitting elements 12a that light up at the same time, the illumination direction can be freely changed. This will be useful when combining a plurality of inspection images obtained by imaging an inspection object (food sample) illuminated from different directions.
  • the ring lighting device 13 includes a plurality of light emitting elements 13a arranged in a ring shape, a reflection plate 13b, and a diffusion plate 13c.
  • the reflecting plate 13b reflects the light output from the plurality of light emitting elements 13a toward the diffusing plate 13c.
  • the diffusion plate 13c uniformly diffuses the light from the reflection plate 13b.
  • the coaxial illumination device 14 has a plurality of light emitting elements 14a arranged in a concentric circle or an array.
  • FIG. 3 shows the electrical configuration of the head device 1a.
  • the MCU 20 is a processor that executes a control program 27 stored in the storage device 25 and controls the head device 1a according to the control program 27.
  • MCU is an abbreviation for microcontroller unit.
  • the MCU 20 controls the main camera 11 and the front camera 10 via the imaging control unit 21, and acquires various image data.
  • the imaging control unit 21 controls, for example, the exposure time of the main camera 11.
  • the MCU 20 turns on and off the ring lighting devices 12 and 13 and the coaxial lighting device 14 via the lighting control unit 22.
  • the lighting control unit 22 controls the driving power supplied to the ring lighting devices 12 and 13 and the coaxial lighting device 14.
  • the MCU 20 receives user input from the operation unit 8 via the operation reception unit 23 .
  • the operation reception section 23 includes an input circuit that generates a signal indicating the state of the switch section of the operation section 8, and the like.
  • the communication circuit 24 is a circuit that communicates with the PC 1b shown in FIG. 4 via the communication cable 26.
  • Communication circuit 24 may include a wireless communication circuit and a LAN interface circuit.
  • LAN is an abbreviation for local area network.
  • Communication cable 26 may be, for example, a USB cable.
  • the storage device 25 includes, for example, a read-only memory (ROM) that stores the control program 27 and a random access memory (RAM) that is used as a work area.
  • the storage device 25 may store, for example, inspection conditions 28 set by the PC 1b, inspection images 29 acquired by the main camera 11, and the like.
  • the inspection conditions 28 may include, for example, illumination conditions, imaging conditions, count conditions, and the like.
  • the inspection image 29 is an image of the Petri dish 15 containing the culture medium and sample.
  • FIG. 4 shows a PC 1b that controls the head device 1a.
  • the MCU 30 is a processor that executes a program stored in the storage device 35 and controls the PC 1b and the head device 1a according to the program.
  • the MCU 30 receives user instructions from the keyboard 32 and pointing device 33 connected to the input/output circuit 31.
  • the MCU 30 controls a printer 38 connected to the input/output circuit 31 to print tables and the like on paper.
  • the MCU 30 displays various information on a display device 37 via a display control unit 36 such as a graphics board.
  • the communication circuit 34 is a circuit that communicates with the head device 1a via the communication cable 26.
  • Communication circuit 34 may include a wireless communication circuit and a LAN interface circuit.
  • the storage device 35 includes, for example, a read-only memory (ROM) that stores programs and a random access memory (RAM) that is used as a work area. Furthermore, storage device 35 may include a hard disk drive (HDD) and a solid state drive (SSD). The storage device 35 may store an application program 39, inspection conditions 28, inspection images 29, sample DB 40, count table 55, and the like. DB is an abbreviation for database.
  • the application program 39 is in charge of, for example, creating and editing the sample DB 40 and the count table 55, controlling the head device 1, and the like. Inspection conditions 28 are set by MCU 30 according to application program 39. The inspection image 29 is received from the head device 1 .
  • the sample DB 40 is a database that is referred to when creating the count table 55.
  • the count table 55 is a table in which a plurality of cells are arranged in an array, and includes row elements and column elements.
  • the communication circuit 34 of the PC 1b may perform wireless communication with a terminal device 1c such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal.
  • the terminal device 1c may display the count table 55 or a test list created from the count table 55.
  • the test list includes petri dish number, sample name, bacterial species, culture medium, dilution ratio, culture time, etc., and is referred to when the user prepares test specimens in petri dish 15.
  • the general inspection procedure is as follows. (1) The user creates an inspection list by hand.
  • the test list includes a plurality of lines, and each line allows writing of petri dish number, bacterial species, dilution ratio, count number, and comments (sample product name, etc.).
  • the petri dish number here is identification information that is assigned in advance according to a predetermined rule in order to specify culture conditions such as the type of medium and dilution ratio.
  • the user writes a number on the lid of the petri dish according to the test list, or writes the number previously written on the petri dish in the test list.
  • the user creates a culture medium according to the dilution factor written in the test list.
  • the user If the dilution factor is not written in the test list, the user writes the actual dilution factor in the test list. (4) The user puts (mixes) the sample into the culture medium of each petri dish. The user writes the sample name in the comment field of the test list. (5) The user puts the petri dish into the incubator. (6) After a predetermined period of time has passed, the user takes out the petri dish from the incubator and counts the number of colonies. For example, while looking through the colonies from the bottom side of the Petri dish, the user marks the positions of the colonies with a permanent marker to indicate that they have been counted. The number of colonies is written into the inspection list. Note that the user may count the number of colonies for each type of bacteria while visually confirming the types of bacteria.
  • the user writes the number of colonies for each bacterial species in the test list for each petri dish.
  • the user starts up the PC and inputs the numbers and characters written in the inspection list into the spreadsheet software while reading them.
  • the number of colonies is tallied using the macro function of spreadsheet software.
  • an inspection list is created by hand, which is a very troublesome task for the user. Furthermore, if there is an incorrect input when transcribing numerical values written in the inspection list onto a sheet of spreadsheet software, there is a possibility that the tabulation results will also be incorrect. Even if the number of colonies could be automatically obtained using a colony counter, the conventional method still requires creating an inspection list, writing the number of colonies to the inspection list, and converting the inspection list to a spreadsheet software sheet. All transcriptions were handwritten, and there was a possibility of errors or typos.
  • an electronic inspection list is created using the PC1b, colonies are counted according to the electronic inspection list, the counting results are directly input into the electronic inspection list, and the input number is totaled. It is suggested that This will reduce the burden on the user regarding post-processing of colony counting results. Furthermore, since handwriting or manual input by the user is reduced, erroneous input will also be reduced and inspection accuracy will be improved.
  • FIG. 5 shows the UI 50 of the count application program displayed on the display device 37 of the PC 1b.
  • the count application program is stored in the storage device 35 and executed by the MCU 30.
  • the UI 50 includes buttons, links, tabs, etc. for switching between multiple functions of the counting application program.
  • the UI 50 has a table creation area 51 and a DB display area 61.
  • DB is an abbreviation for database.
  • the table creation area 51 displays at least a count table 55.
  • the title display section 52 receives the input of the title (name) given to the count table 55 from the keyboard 32 and displays it.
  • the button 53 is a button for switching execution/non-execution of counting each cell.
  • the button 54 is a button for instructing to add a column to the count table 55.
  • the DB display area 61 displays a list of templates of count items registered in advance (eg, sample DB 40).
  • the count item corresponds to one line in the count table 55.
  • Count items are usually distinguished by the name of the object to be inspected (sample name).
  • the name display section 62 displays the name of the model (sample name) registered in advance.
  • the indicator 63 is an object that visually displays the classification tag associated with the sample name.
  • the classification tag is a tag indicating a classification (eg, staple food, prepared dish, dessert) defined by the user.
  • the indicator 63 may represent different classification tags by different colors.
  • the indicators 63 may express different classification tags by different shapes of the indicators 63.
  • the button 67 is a button for expanding and displaying one or more sub-items in a parent-child relationship with respect to a certain sample name.
  • Parent-child relationship refers to the relationship between a certain sample and a plurality of ingredients that make up the sample. For example, if a sandwich is the parent, the ingredients that make up the sandwich (eg, ham, lettuce, egg) are the children.
  • the button 64 is a button for instructing to add the corresponding model to the count table 55. By preparing the sample DB 40 in advance in this way, the user can easily create the count table 55.
  • the MCU 30 when the user presses the button 64 associated with sandwich, the MCU 30 adds one row to the count table 55 and displays "1" as the ID in the ID display cell of the added row. Then, in the added row, "Sandwich” is displayed in the cell that displays the sample name. ID is an abbreviation for identification information. That is, the ID and sample name are set for each row, and are "settings for rows.” Furthermore, the MCU 30 reads out the sandwich inspection conditions registered in the sample DB 40 from the storage device 35, adds a new column to the count table 55, and displays the read inspection conditions in the new column.
  • the test conditions include the type of bacteria (eg, common viable bacteria/E.
  • Each column includes, for example, a cell for bacterial species, a cell for dilution ratio, a cell for culture time, and a cell for count value. That is, the bacterial species, dilution ratio, and culture time are set for each row, and are "settings for each row.” In this example, the test has not yet been executed and the count value has not yet been obtained, so nothing is entered in the count value cell.
  • the first inspection item for sandwiches is that a medium with a dilution rate of 100 times is used for general viable bacteria, and a culture time of 48 hours is applied.
  • the second inspection item for sandwiches is that a medium with a dilution rate of 1000 times is used for general viable bacteria, and a culture time of 48 hours is applied. In this way, the MCU 30 adds columns according to the number of inspection items.
  • FIG. 6 shows that when the user presses a button 64 associated with kimchi, the MCU 30 reads out the test conditions for kimchi registered in the sample DB 40 from the storage device 35, and rows and columns corresponding to the read test conditions. is added to the count table 55.
  • kimchi has two inspection items.
  • the first inspection item for kimchi is that a medium with a dilution rate of 100 times is used for general viable bacteria, and a culture time of 48 hours is applied. This is common to the first inspection item for sandwiches. Therefore, the MCU 30 discards the first inspection item included in the kimchi model and does not add it as a new column.
  • the second inspection item for kimchi is that a medium with a dilution rate of 100 times is used for E. coli, and a 24-hour incubation time is applied. The MCU 30 adds this to the count table 55 as a new column.
  • counting can also be carried out or not carried out by operating the count inversion button 53.
  • the MCU 30 displays text or an image indicating "not tested", or displays a blank field for inputting the count result. It may also be possible to switch between
  • a search box 65 and a tag search refinement button 66 may be added.
  • the MCU 30 may search the storage device 35 based on the characters input in the search box 65 to extract a template, and display the search results in the DB display area 61.
  • the tag search refinement button 66 is pressed, the MCU 30 may display only sample products filtered by the specified classification tag. For example, the same classification tag may be assigned to multiple sample products. In this case, a plurality of sample products to which the selected classification tag is attached are added to the count table 55.
  • FIG. 7 shows another procedure for adding new rows.
  • the user selects the sample name display cell in the new row with the pointer 57 and inputs the sample name using the keyboard 32 in order from the first character.
  • the MCU 30 searches the sample DB 40 using the input one or more characters, and displays sample names as input candidates on the candidate display section 58.
  • the MCU 30 searches for a template that includes "mix” as a sample name, finds “mixed juice”, and displays “mixed juice” in the candidate display section 58. indicate.
  • the MCU 30 reads out the test conditions for the mixed juice from the storage device 35, and selects a column according to the read test conditions. Add. As a result, the search condition will be associated with the mixed juice cell.
  • FIG. 8 shows the UI 50 when creating a new count table.
  • the MCU 30 can launch spreadsheet software in parallel with the application program 39.
  • FIG. 9 shows a sheet 70 of spreadsheet software.
  • the MCU 30 receives a copy-paste instruction to the UI 50 for the sheet 70 or cell group selected in the spreadsheet software. Thereby, the MCU 30 may create the count table 55 shown in FIG. 6.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for creating a new count table 55 by calling the count table 82 in which count values have already been input.
  • the MCU 30 may read the file corresponding to the file name input into the search box 65 from the storage device 35 and display the attribute of the file on the attribute display section 80.
  • the MCU 30 displays the read count table 82 in the table creation area 51.
  • a count value has already been input into the count value cell.
  • the MCU 30 detects that the new creation button 81 has been pressed, it deletes all the count values input in the count value cells that make up the read count table 82 and creates a new count table 55. create.
  • FIG. 11 shows a new count table 55 created from the count table 82 in which count values have already been input. Instead of deleting the count value, the count value may be reset to zero.
  • the MCU 30 may create one count table 55 by merging the plurality of count tables 82.
  • the MCU 30 analyzes the plurality of count tables 82, deletes duplicate rows and columns, and creates a new count table 55.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a method of creating the count table 55 including averaging.
  • the averaging setting section 56 is checked, and when "2" is selected as the number of repetitions, the MCU 30 displays the UI 50 shown in FIG. 11.
  • the MCU 30 divides the input row of count values associated with each sample name into three rows, and adds a column indicating the number of repetitions. .
  • the first row has a cell into which the count value obtained in the first test is input.
  • the second row has cells into which the count values obtained in the second test are entered.
  • the third row has a cell into which the average value of the count value obtained in the first test and the count value obtained in the second test is input.
  • the MCU 30 may add cells into which the count value is input and cells into which the average value is input to the count table 55 depending on the number of repetitions.
  • FIG. 13 shows an example of a parent-child relationship between multiple samples.
  • the MCU 30 selectably displays "ham” and "lettuce", which are ingredients that have a parent-child relationship with the sandwich, in the DB display area 61.
  • the MCU 30 reads the test item "ham” or “lettuce” from the storage device 35 and adds it to the count table 55.
  • FIG. 14 shows that the test items "ham” and “lettuce” have been read from the storage device 35 and added to the count table 55.
  • Sandwich, ham, and lettuce having a parent-child relationship may be registered all at once. For example, when the button 64 associated with sandwiches is pressed, sandwiches, ham, and lettuce may be registered in the table 55 all at once.
  • FIG. 15 shows a dialog 90 for adding columns.
  • the MCU 30 displays a dialog 90 on the display device 37.
  • the item name setting section 91 accepts input of the name of the bacterial species, which is the item name of the column.
  • the column type setting section 92 accepts settings as to whether the column type is a count column or a free column.
  • a count column is a column containing cells into which count values are input.
  • a free column is a column in which the user can freely input text, images, and other information such as notes and comments.
  • the dilution rate setting unit 93 receives input of a dilution rate.
  • the culture time setting unit 94 receives input of culture time.
  • the algorithm setting unit 95 receives settings for image processing applied to the inspection image. Residue removal is a mode in which residues (eg, dust, dirt, handwriting) attached to the Petri dish 15 or the like are reduced by image processing.
  • the rapid mode is a mode that emphasizes quick confirmation of results, and is a mode in which [0] a Petri dish 15 cultured in a shorter culture time than conventional methods is inspected with high sensitivity.
  • the culture medium type setting section 96 accepts selection of the type of culture medium (eg, general viable bacteria (white), general viable bacteria (black)), and the like. Note that when the list button 96a is pressed, the MCU 30 may read the medium type candidates from the storage device 35, create a list, and display the list on the display device 37.
  • the count setting section 97 accepts settings such as photographing conditions (eg, exposure time) of the main camera 11, type of illumination (eg, brightness, lighting device), type of display processing, type of image processing, etc. That is, the bacterial species, dilution factor, culture time, algorithm settings, medium type, or count settings accepted in the dialog 90 are set for each column as default settings.
  • FIG. 16 shows the UI 100 displayed on the display device 37 of the PC 1b while the PC 1b controls the head device 1a to execute the counting process.
  • the count table area 101 is an area for displaying the count table 55 edited through the UI 50.
  • the result area 102 is an area for displaying the inspection image 103 acquired by the main camera 11 of the head device 1a.
  • the inspection image 103 may be a moving image or a still image.
  • the MCU 30 controls the main camera 11. 11, a moving image is acquired and displayed in the result area 102.
  • the MCU 30 acquires a still image using the main camera 11 and displays it in the result area 102.
  • the check box 106 is a control object for selecting whether or not to display the count result in the count value area 104.
  • the first software button 105a is a button that has the same function as the first hardware button 8a.
  • the second software button 105b is a button that has the same function as the second hardware button 8b.
  • a shooting instruction is assigned to the first software button 105a.
  • a registration instruction is assigned to the second software button 105b.
  • the second software button 105b is shown with a broken line, which means that it is inoperable.
  • Inspection conditions sensitivity when binarizing colonies, type of lighting device, brightness, etc.
  • the MCU 20 of the head device 1a controls the main camera 11, ring illumination devices 12, 13, and coaxial illumination device 14 according to the received inspection conditions, acquires images, and transmits them to the PC 1b. Note that when another cell is selected, the MCU 30 reads the inspection conditions associated with the selected cell from the storage device 35 and transmits them to the head device 1a.
  • the MCU 20 of the head device 1a controls the main camera 11, ring illumination devices 12, 13, and coaxial illumination device 14 according to the received inspection conditions, acquires images, and transmits them to the PC 1b. In this way, the user can change the inspection conditions by selecting a cell.
  • FIG. 17 shows an inspection condition confirmation screen 110 that is displayed when the pointer 57 clicks on the settings tab or button. This allows the user to check the inspection conditions for each cell.
  • the confirmation screen 110 may be displayed by right-clicking a cell with the pointer 57.
  • the information displayed on the confirmation screen 110 includes, for example, sample name, type of medium, dilution factor, culture time, petri dish number, comment, imaging settings (on/off of epi-illumination, type of illumination device, brightness of epi-illumination, These include the brightness of transmitted illumination, image processing (count settings such as on/off of high dynamic range "HDR", on/off of ring removal, etc.)
  • “upper ring” is an abbreviation for the ring illumination device 12.
  • “Lower ring” is an abbreviation for the ring illumination device 13.
  • “Surface” is an abbreviation for the coaxial illumination device 14.
  • the MCU 30 represents the bacterial species, dilution ratio, culture time, algorithm settings, and medium type. , or shooting settings (count settings), default values are set for each column on the dialog 90 shown in FIG. 15, but they can also be set individually for each cell on the confirmation screen 110 shown in FIG. good.
  • the confirmation screen 110 displaying a list of settings corresponding to the cell may be displayed superimposed on the UI 100. Further, when a cell is selected by the pointer 57, the MCU 30 may display settings corresponding to the cell on the UI 100.
  • FIG. 18 shows a UI 100 that the MCU 30 displays on the display device 37 when the first software button 105a or the first hardware button 8a, which is a shooting button, is pressed.
  • the result area 102 an image 103 (still image) of the petri dish 15 is displayed.
  • the MCU 30 assigns the first software button 105a to a button (count button) that instructs counting from the shooting button.
  • FIG. 19 shows the UI 100 that the MCU 30 displays on the display device 37 when the first software button 105a or the first hardware button 8a, which is a count button, is pressed.
  • the MCU 30 instructs the head device 1a to count colonies.
  • the MCU 20 of the head device 1a counts colonies according to the count instruction and transmits the count value to the PC 1b.
  • the counting process may be executed by the MCU 30.
  • the MCU 30 displays the count value in the count value area 104. In this case, the MCU 30 may convert the count value into CFU/mL (number of colonies per unit volume (milliliter)) and display it in the count value area 104.
  • the MCU 30 may switch the display in order of only the count value, only CFU/mL, and count value + CFU/mL.
  • CFU is an abbreviation for colony forming unit.
  • the MCU 30 reassigns the first software button 105a from the count button to the shooting button. Further, the MCU 30 changes the second software button 105b and second hardware button 8b assigned to the registration button from an inoperable state to an operable state.
  • FIG. 20 shows a state in which the registration button is pressed.
  • the MCU 30 may write a count value to the currently selected cell and change the next cell to be selected (the cell of interest).
  • the cell of interest active cell
  • the MCU 30 automatically selects the next cell, thereby reducing the burden on the user.
  • the MCU 30 returns the second software button 105b and second hardware button 8b assigned to the registration button from an operable state to an inoperable state.
  • the UI 100 shown in FIG. 20 has a cell display target change menu 109.
  • "Count” is selected in the change menu 109, "100" is displayed in the cell.
  • the MCU 30 changes the cell display target from “count number” to "CFU/mL". This allows the user to easily switch the cell display target.
  • the MCU 30 changes the cell display target to "comment". This allows the user to easily switch the cell display target to comments. Also, in this UI 100, the user can directly input a comment such as "contamination has occurred" as shown in FIG. 22.
  • the comment is a note included in one line of the count table.
  • FIG. 23 shows the UI 100 that the MCU 30 displays on the display device 37 when a cell in which a count value has been input is double-clicked.
  • the settings screen 120 includes a control object for adjusting parameters related to the colony detection algorithm among the test conditions associated with the cell selected by double-clicking.
  • the slide bar 121 is, for example, a control object for setting a threshold value for removing small particles through image processing.
  • the slide bar 122 is a control object for adjusting colony detection sensitivity.
  • the MCU 30 may display a mark such as a circle in a superimposed manner on a portion detected as a colony. Since the MCU 30 changes the algorithm according to the adjustment of the slide bars 121 and 122, the position and number of marks indicating colonies also change. This will make it easier for the user to find an appropriate amount of adjustment.
  • FIG. 24 shows an example of functions assigned to the first hardware button 8a (first software button 105a) and the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b).
  • the image 103 is a moving image, and the state of the active cell is that no count value has been input, press the first hardware button 8a (the first A count button is assigned to the software button 105a), and a registration button (inoperable) is assigned to the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b).
  • the image 103 is a moving image, and the state of the active cell is that the count value has already been input, press the first hardware button 8a (the first A count button is assigned to the software button 105a), and a registration button (inoperable) is assigned to the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b).
  • the image 103 is a still image, and the state of the active cell is that no count value has been input, press the first hardware button 8a (the first A shooting button is assigned to the software button 105a), and a registration button (operable) is assigned to the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b).
  • the shooting button may also be called a reshooting button.
  • the image 103 is a still image, and the state of the active cell is that the count value has been input, press the first hardware button 8a (the first A shooting button is assigned to the software button 105a), and a registration button (inoperable) is assigned to the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b).
  • the image 103 is a moving image, and the state of the active cell is that no count value has been entered, press the first hardware button 8a (the first A count button is assigned to the software button 105a), and a registration button (inoperable) is assigned to the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b).
  • the image 103 is a moving image, and the state of the active cell is that the count value has already been input, press the first hardware button 8a (the first A count button is assigned to the software button 105a), and a registration button (inoperable) is assigned to the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b).
  • the image 103 is a still image, and the state of the active cell is that no count value has been input, press the first hardware button 8a (the first A shooting button is assigned to the software button 105a), and a registration button (operable) is assigned to the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b).
  • the image 103 is a still image, and the state of the active cell is that the count value has already been input, press the first hardware button 8a (the first A shooting button is assigned to the software button 105a), and a re-registration button (operable) is assigned to the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b).
  • the state where "the count table is not displayed” may be a state where the count table into which the count results have been input is displayed and the count results can be re-edited.
  • FIG. 25 shows the UI 100 provided with an edit tab 124 for re-editing.
  • the "count table not displayed” state displayed in FIG. 24 may be a state in which the count table into which the count results have been input is displayed and the edit tab 124 is clicked.
  • the inspection condition tab 123 is a tab for displaying the inspection condition confirmation screen 110 shown in FIG. 17. As described above, settings for lighting and the main camera 11 can be changed on the confirmation screen 110.
  • the moving image is changed to a still image, the count result is displayed, and the registration button becomes operable. If the registration button is pressed while a still image is being displayed, the count result is written into the active cell, and the result area 102 returns to the state of displaying a moving image.
  • the once registered count result is changed and the re-registration button is pressed, the changed count result is overwritten on the count table and the result area 102 returns to the state of displaying a moving image.
  • the shooting button re-shooting button
  • the result area 102 returns to the state of displaying a moving image.
  • FIG. 26 shows a file UI 200 that calls a file such as a count table.
  • Button 210 is a button for specifying a count table as a target to be called.
  • the file list 211 is an area that displays files stored in the storage device 35 as a list 212. When the button 210 is pressed, the MCU 30 displays, in the file list 211, only files that have extensions specific to the count table among the plurality of files.
  • the list 212 includes ID (serial number), title, last updated date, whether counting has been completed, and other information.
  • the search box 213 is a box into which a keyword for further searching for a desired file from the plurality of files included in the list 212 is input.
  • the button 214 is a button for instructing to start the front camera 10 in order to read the identification image added to the inspection list created by printing the count sheet on paper.
  • the open button 215 is a button for instructing to open the count table selected from the list 212.
  • FIG. 27 shows the test list 220.
  • the MCU 30 may output the inspection list 220 from the printer 38 or may output it to the display device of the terminal device 1c.
  • the inspection list 220 is a list created from the corresponding count table 55. The order in which the information is arranged in the count table 55 and the order in which the information is arranged in the test list 220 may be different or may match.
  • the test list 220 may be the same as the count table 55 displayed on the display device 37. Furthermore, since there is no need to write count results in the test list 220, cells for writing count results may be omitted. Furthermore, if the user uses the test list 220 to prepare a culture sample, the culture time is not necessarily required. Therefore, cells for culture time may be omitted.
  • the inspection list 220 may be provided with an identification image 221 such as a one-dimensional symbol or a two-dimensional symbol as identification information for identifying each count table.
  • the identification image 221 may include user identification information.
  • the MCU 30 instructs the head device 1a to start the front camera 10.
  • the MCU 20 of the head device 1a starts the front camera 10 and attempts to read the identification image 221.
  • Identification image 221 may simply be called a symbol.
  • the user positions the inspection list 220 with respect to the front camera 10 so that the front camera 10 reads the identification image 221.
  • the MCU 20 successfully reads the identification image 221, it decodes the identification information from the identification image 221 and transmits it to the PC 1b.
  • the MCU 30 reads the count table associated with the identification information received from the head device 1a from the storage device 35.
  • FIG. 28 shows a user authentication tag 230 worn by the user. Due to data integrity regulations, various restrictions may be imposed on users who use the head device 1a. For example, according to 21 CFR Part 11, which is a regulation of the US FDA (Food and Drug Administration), users are required to be managed physically and logically.
  • the user authentication tag 230 may be used to limit the functions that can be used for each user in the head device 1a and the PC 1b.
  • the MCU 20 or MCU 30 may perform user authentication by having the user read the identification image 221 of the user authentication tag 230 with the front camera 10. That is, the identification image 221 may include symbols indicating account information such as a user name and password. However, the user name and password are encrypted and become the identification image 221.
  • Possible functional limitations for each user include the following: As an example, users are divided into administrators, leaders, and workers.
  • the administrator can add users and set permissions for each user.
  • the reader can create a counting table, perform counting, save the counting results, edit the counting results, and output (print, send) the counting results. Workers can perform counting and save the counting results.
  • the MCU 20 and the MCU 30 may limit the functions that the user can perform, depending on the authority of the user identified from the identification image 221.
  • the identification image 221 is read by the front camera 10 here, the identification image 221 may also be read by the main camera 11.
  • the front camera 10 and the main camera 11 may image and read the petri dish number and identification image 221 printed on a sticker 270 attached to the petri dish 15.
  • the identification image 221 may be encoded with identification information of the count table 55, a sample name, unique identification information indicating a cell in which the count result is stored, and the like. That is, by reading the identification image 221, the MCU 30 can specify the count table 55, sample name, petri dish 15, and test conditions. Furthermore, the MCU 30 transmits the specified inspection conditions to the head device 1a, and the MCU 20 of the head device 1a controls the main camera 11, ring illumination devices 12, 13, and coaxial illumination device 14 according to the received inspection conditions. , images can be obtained.
  • FIG. 29 shows a count table 55 to which a new column to be used as a note is added by pressing the button 54.
  • the new column is defined as a free column and can hold not only letters and numbers but also images.
  • FIG. 30 shows an edit screen 240 that is displayed when a cell in a free column is right-clicked with the pointer 57.
  • the text "product number:” has already been entered in the cell, and a dialog 241 for entering the following text is displayed.
  • the dialog 241 is displayed by right-clicking inside the text box on the editing screen 240 with the pointer 57.
  • the dialog 241 includes a plurality of options for reading a code from a product or the like using the front camera 10 and inputting the reading result into a cell.
  • the options include reading the code using the front camera 10. For example, when "code reading (one-dimensional symbol)" is selected by the pointer 57 and the read button 242 is pressed, the MCU 30 instructs the head device 1a to read the one-dimensional symbol.
  • FIG. 31 shows a reading screen 250 displayed on the display device 37 when the reading button 242 is pressed.
  • the check box 251 is a check box for instructing the MCU 30 to automatically close the reading screen 250 when the MCU 20 successfully recognizes the code.
  • the image area 252 displays a moving image or a still image captured by the front camera 10.
  • the reading result area 253 is an area that displays text decoded from one-dimensional symbols and two-dimensional symbols.
  • the MCU 20 of the head device 1a activates the front camera 10, causes it to read the one-dimensional code, decodes text from the one-dimensional code, and transmits the decoded text to the PC 1b.
  • the user confirms the text displayed in the reading result area 253 and presses the OK button 254 or cancel button 255.
  • the OK button 254 is pressed, the MCU 30 closes the reading screen 250, returns to the editing screen 240, and inserts the text received from the head device 1a into the cell.
  • the cancel button 255 is pressed, the text received from the head device 1a is discarded, the reading screen 250 is closed, and the screen returns to the editing screen 240.
  • FIG. 32 shows the edit screen 240 with text inserted.
  • the MCU 30 closes the editing screen 240 and displays the UI 50 shown in FIG. 29 on the display device 37.
  • FIG. 33 shows an example of a part of a count table or a count report 260 created from the count table.
  • Image data can be associated with cells in free columns included in the count table 55.
  • the MCU 30 controls the main camera 11 of the head device 1a to obtain an image of the petri dish 15 (petri dish image), and associates the obtained petri dish image with a cell.
  • the MCU 30 may control the front camera 10 of the head device 1a to obtain an image of the petri dish 15 (petri dish image), and may associate the obtained petri dish image with the cell.
  • the MCU 30 may control the front camera 10 of the head device 1a to obtain an external appearance image of the product, and may associate the obtained external appearance image with a cell.
  • the MCU 30 may control the front camera 10 of the head device 1a to read and decode the barcode given to the product, and input the decoded product number etc. into the cell.
  • MCU 30 may control printer 38 and print count report 260 on paper.
  • various images are acquired by the front camera 10, but various images may be acquired by the main camera 11 and associated with the cells.
  • FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a series of processes executed by the MCU 30 of PC1b.
  • the MCU 30 executes the following processing according to the count application program stored in the storage device 35.
  • the MCU 30 edits the count table. As explained using FIGS. 5 to 15 and the like, the count table is edited or created through the UI 50 and the like.
  • the MCU 30 stores the count table in the storage device 35.
  • the MCU 30 identifies the count table. Identification of the count table may be performed using the front camera 10 and the inspection list 220 or the user authentication tag 230, or may be performed using the file UI 200 shown in FIG. 26.
  • the MCU 30 reads the specified count table from the storage device 35. As a result, the UI 100 shown in FIG. 16 is displayed on the display device 37.
  • the MCU 30 specifies the cell to which the count value is written. Initially, a cell in the top row of the count table may be selected, or a cell clicked by the pointer 57 may be selected.
  • the MCU 30 specifies test conditions associated with the active cell. For example, the MCU 30 reads the inspection conditions associated with each cell from the storage device 35 when creating the count table.
  • the MCU 30 sets the inspection conditions associated with the active cell in the head device 1a. As described above, the sensitivity of the main camera 11, the lighting device to be lit, the brightness, the number of light emitting elements to be lit (irradiation direction), image processing (HDR, ring removal), counting algorithm (parameters such as threshold) etc. are sent to the head device 1a.
  • the sensitivity of the main camera 11, the lighting device to be lit, the brightness, the number of light emitting elements to be lit (irradiation direction), image processing (HDR, ring removal), counting algorithm (parameters such as threshold) etc. are sent to the head device 1a.
  • the MCU 30 determines whether the inspection conditions have been changed. As described above, the test conditions associated with a cell can be changed at any time even during testing. Therefore, when the inspection conditions are changed, the MCU 30 returns to S7 and transmits the changed inspection conditions to the head device 1a. If the inspection conditions have not been changed, the MCU 30 proceeds to S9.
  • the MCU 30 determines whether a shooting instruction has been input by the user.
  • the user can instruct photography by pressing the first hardware button 8a of the head device 1a or the first software button 105a of the UI 100. If no photographing instruction has been input, the MCU 30 returns from S9 to S8. When the shooting instruction is input, the MCU 30 proceeds from S9 to S10.
  • the MCU 30 transmits an imaging instruction to the head device 1a.
  • the MCU 30 acquires an image (inspection image) of the petri dish image 103 acquired by the main camera 11 from the head device 1a, and displays the inspection image in the result area 102 of the UI 100.
  • the MCU 30 determines whether a count instruction has been input.
  • the user can input a count instruction by pressing the first hardware button 8a of the head device 1a or the first software button 105a of the UI 100, which is assigned as a count button. If no count instruction has been input, the MCU 30 returns to S8 from S12. When the count instruction is input, the MCU 30 proceeds from S12 to S13.
  • the MCU 30 transmits a count instruction to the head device 1a. Note that when the counting process is executed by the PC 1b, the MCU 30 executes the counting process instead of the MCU 20.
  • the MCU 30 receives the count result from the head device 1a and displays the count result in the count value area 104. Note that when the MCU 30 executes the counting process in S14, the MCU 30 displays the count result obtained by executing the counting process in the count value area 104.
  • the MCU 30 determines whether inspection conditions such as image processing and counting algorithm have been changed. When the inspection conditions are changed, the process returns to S13. If the inspection conditions have not been changed, the MCU 30 proceeds to S16. It should be noted that the change in the inspection conditions in S8 is assumed to be a change in the inspection conditions that would require reacquisition of the image. Although the change in inspection conditions in S15 results in a change in image processing for the acquired image, it is assumed that re-acquisition of the image is unnecessary.
  • the MCU 30 determines whether a registration instruction has been input by the user.
  • the user can input a registration instruction by pressing the second hardware button 8b of the head device 1a or the second software button 105b of the UI 100, which is assigned as a registration button. If no registration instruction has been input, the MCU 30 returns from S16 to S8, and retakes the image or changes the inspection conditions. When the registration instruction is input, the MCU 30 proceeds from S16 to S17.
  • the MCU 30 registers the count result in the active cell.
  • the MCU 30 determines whether all counts have been completed. For example, if count results have been input to all cells in the count table, the MCU 30 determines that counting has ended. If there are still uninput cells, the MCU 30 proceeds from S18 to S5 and changes the active cell to the next cell (cell identification).
  • FIG. 35 shows a series of processes executed by the MCU 20 of the head device 1a according to the control program.
  • the MCU 20 determines whether or not an instruction for photographing the front camera 10 has been received.
  • an instruction for photographing the front camera 10 (instruction to read a code) is input from the PC 1b to the head device 1a. If no photographing instruction for the front camera 10 has been input, the MCU 20 proceeds from S21 to S23. When a photographing instruction for the front camera 10 is input, the MCU 20 proceeds from S21 to S22.
  • the MCU 20 activates the front camera 10 to acquire an image (front camera image), and transmits the front camera image or the decoding result of the symbol to the PC 1b.
  • the MCU 20 receives the test conditions from the PC 1b and stores them in the storage device 25.
  • the MCU 20 sets inspection conditions for each part. Among the inspection conditions, sensitivity is set in the imaging control section 21. The lighting device to be lit, brightness, lighting direction, etc. are set in the lighting control unit 22.
  • the MCU 20 determines whether an instruction to change the test conditions has been received from the PC 1b. Change instructions are received along with new test conditions. When the instruction to change the test conditions is received, the MCU 20 returns to S24 and sets new test conditions. If the change instruction has not been received, the MCU 20 proceeds from S25 to S26.
  • the MCU 20 determines whether an imaging instruction has been received from the PC 1b. If no imaging instruction has been input, the MCU 20 returns to S25 from S26. When the imaging instruction is input, the MCU 20 proceeds from S26 to S27.
  • the MCU 20 activates the main camera 11 to acquire an inspection image, and transmits the inspection image to the PC 1b.
  • the MCU 20 determines whether a count instruction has been input from the head device 1a. If no count instruction has been input, the MCU 20 returns to S25 from S28. When the count instruction is input, the MCU 20 proceeds from S28 to S29.
  • the MCU 20 performs colony counting according to the test conditions.
  • the MCU 20 transmits the count result to the PC 1b.
  • the MCU 20 determines whether a count end instruction has been received. When the count end instruction is received, the MCU 20 ends counting. If the count end instruction has not been received, the MCU 20 returns from S31 to S23 and receives the test conditions for the next cell.
  • the count table has multiple rows and columns, and each cell is associated with an inspection condition. Count tables and inspection lists may be revised daily. However, tests may be performed on the same sample every day. Therefore, by registering samples that are frequently tested in the sample DB 40 in advance, the burden of creating a count table can be reduced. Therefore, when creating a sample table, the user may register row elements corresponding to each sample in the sample DB 40.
  • FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the sample DB 40 editing process executed by the MCU 30 of the PC 1b.
  • the MCU 30 executes the following processing according to the application program 39 stored in the storage device 35.
  • the MCU 30 accepts selection of a row element desired to be registered in the sample DB 40 from among a plurality of row elements included in the count table. For example, the MCU 30 may accept a click by the pointer 57 on any of the row elements included in the sample table.
  • the MCU 30 receives an instruction to add the selected row element. For example, when a right click is performed with the pointer 57 while a row element is selected, an additional instruction may be input.
  • the MCU 30 acquires the sample name of the row element for which addition has been instructed, and determines whether the same sample name has already been registered in the sample DB 40 (duplication determination). If the row element specified to be added does not already exist, the MCU 30 proceeds from S43 to S45. If the row element specified to be added exists in the sample DB 40, the MCU 30 proceeds from S43 to S44.
  • the MCU 30 asks the user whether to overwrite the row element in the sample DB 40.
  • the cancel instruction is input, the MCU 30 cancels the addition of the row element.
  • the overwrite instruction is input, the MCU 30 proceeds from S44 to S45.
  • the MCU 30 acquires the item names (eg, sample name, bacterial species, culture medium type, dilution ratio) that constitute the row element to be added.
  • item names eg, sample name, bacterial species, culture medium type, dilution ratio
  • the MCU 30 acquires the inspection conditions associated with the cells of the row elements from the storage device 35.
  • the MCU 30 registers the item name and inspection conditions in the sample DB 40.
  • the MCU 30 updates the display of the sample DB 40 on the UI 50.
  • FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the count table editing process executed by the MCU 30 of the PC 1b.
  • the MCU 30 executes the following processing according to the count application program stored in the storage device 35.
  • the MCU 30 identifies a position (cell or row) in the count table where a new row element is to be added. For example, the MCU 30 selects the next row after the last row in which the sample name has been input in the count table. Note that a new row may be selected between a certain row and another row. For example, when a row in which a sample name has already been input is selected in the count table and a right click is performed using the pointer 57, a blank row is added next to the selected row.
  • the MCU 30 determines whether an instruction to add a row has been given from the sample DB 40. For example, when the button 64 on the UI 50 is pressed, the MCU 30 recognizes that the sample DB 40 has instructed to add a row. When the sample DB 40 instructs to add a row, the MCU 30 proceeds to S53. If there is no instruction to add a row from the sample DB 40, the MCU 30 proceeds to S61.
  • the MCU 30 acquires the item name of the line for which addition has been instructed from the sample DB 40.
  • the MCU 30 acquires the inspection conditions of the row for which addition has been instructed from the sample DB 40.
  • the MCU 30 pastes the acquired item names and inspection conditions onto the count table. That is, the MCU 30 adds a new row element to the count table.
  • the MCU 30 may determine whether a row element specified by the user among the plurality of row elements held in the sample DB 40 is included in the new count table. Further, if it is determined that the row element specified by the user is not included in the new count table, the MCU 30 selects a column element cell whose row element specified by the user is not included in the new count table. It may be determined whether or not it is included. If it is determined that the row element specified by the user includes a cell of a column element that is not included in the new count table, the MCU 30 adds the column element to the new count table. In other words, column elements are added to row elements that are already in the count table and are given other sample names.
  • the MCU 30 determines whether editing is complete. When the user instructs to complete the editing, the MCU 30 stores the count table in the storage device 35. If editing completion is not instructed by the user, the MCU 30 returns to S51 from S56.
  • the MCU 30 receives input of an item name through the keyboard 32 or pointing device 33 in S61.
  • the MCU 30 accepts input of inspection conditions through the keyboard 32 or pointing device 33.
  • the MCU 30 writes the acquired item names and inspection conditions into the count table. After that, the MCU 30 proceeds to S56.
  • FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the count table identification process executed by the MCU 30 of the PC 1b.
  • the MCU 30 executes the following processing according to the count application program stored in the storage device 35.
  • the MCU 30 determines whether an instruction to start the front camera 10 has been input. For example, when the button 214 of the file UI 200 shown in FIG. 26 is clicked, the MCU 30 determines that a startup instruction has been input, and proceeds to S72.
  • the MCU 30 transmits an instruction to start the front camera 10 to the head device 1a.
  • the MCU 30 waits for the head device 1a to successfully read the identification image 221.
  • the MCU 30 acquires the identification information decoded from the identification image 221 in the head device 1a.
  • the MCU 30 searches the storage device 35 for a count table corresponding to the identification information.
  • the MCU 30 determines whether a count table corresponding to the identification information has been found. If the count table does not exist, the MCU 30 returns to S71. If the count table exists, the MCU 30 proceeds to S77.
  • the MCU 30 reads the count table from the storage device 35 and sets it in the UI 100.
  • the MCU 30 proceeds to S78.
  • the MCU 30 displays a count table search screen on the display device 37.
  • the MCU 30 accepts the selection of a count table. For example, any count table may be selected in the file UI 200 shown in FIG. 26. After that, the MCU 30 proceeds to S77.
  • FIG. 39 shows the colony counting process executed by the MCU 20 of the head device 1a according to the control program. However, the image processing and counting processing may be performed by the MCU 30.
  • the MCU 20 acquires a count algorithm from the inspection conditions received from the PC 1b. Specifically, image processing and threshold parameters (eg, binarization threshold) used in the counting algorithm are acquired.
  • image processing and threshold parameters eg, binarization threshold
  • the MCU 20 applies a counting algorithm to the inspection image acquired by the main camera 11. For example, image processing such as HDR and ring removal is applied to the inspection image.
  • the MCU 20 counts colonies included in the test image according to the test conditions (threshold parameters).
  • FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the process of registering information in free columns such as note cells, which is executed by the MCU 30 of the PC 1b.
  • the MCU 30 executes the following processing according to the count application program stored in the storage device 35.
  • the MCU 30 accepts the selection of a comment cell.
  • a comment cell is mentioned as an example, but it may be a cell in another free column.
  • the MCU 30 sets the remark cell selected by the pointer 57 as an active cell.
  • the MCU 30 specifies the attribute of the comment cell.
  • Each cell may be given an attribute (eg, count value, character string, image) in advance.
  • the MCU 30 reads the attributes of each cell from the storage device 35.
  • the MCU 30 determines whether activation of the front camera has been instructed. If activation of the front camera 10 is not instructed, the MCU 30 inputs the text input from the keyboard 32 or the like into the remarks cell. On the other hand, when the activation instruction is input, the MCU 30 proceeds to S94.
  • the MCU 30 activates the front camera 10 of the head device 1a.
  • the MCU 30 acquires an image using the front camera 10.
  • the MCU 30 determines whether the specified attribute is an image. If the attribute is an image, the MCU 30 proceeds to S97.
  • the MCU 30 associates the image acquired by the front camera 10 (eg, the exterior image of the product) with the remarks cell.
  • the MCU 30 acquires the decoding result of the image acquired by the front camera 10 from the head device 1a.
  • the MCU 30 writes the acquired information (decoding result (eg, product serial number, etc.)) into the remarks cell.
  • decoding result eg, product serial number, etc.
  • FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of halation.
  • culture medium There are various types of culture medium, but the most common one is a liquid culture medium placed in a petri dish 15. As shown on the left side of FIG. 42, when the petri dish 15 is uniformly irradiated with illumination light from all directions, halation (ring) may occur on the outline of the colony. In a film-like culture medium as shown in FIG. 42, halation may occur due to undulations occurring on the surface of the film. Therefore, in this embodiment, a process for reducing halation (hereinafter referred to as gloss reduction process) is adopted. This reduces halation, as shown in the image on the right side of FIG. 42.
  • gloss reduction process a process for reducing halation
  • FIG. 43 shows the arrangement of the plurality of light emitting elements 12a in the ring illumination devices 12 and 13.
  • 32 light emitting elements 12a are arranged in an annular shape on the substrate 400.
  • the MCU 20 can light up any number of light emitting elements 12a among the 32 light emitting elements 12a.
  • FIG. 44 shows lighting patterns for realizing four lighting directions i to iv.
  • the lighting pattern i is a pattern in which the eight light emitting elements 12a located above in FIG. 44 are lit.
  • the lighting pattern ii is a pattern in which eight light emitting elements 12a located on the right side in FIG. 44 are lit.
  • Lighting pattern iii is a pattern in which eight light emitting elements 12a located at the bottom in FIG. 44 are lit.
  • the lighting pattern iv is a pattern in which eight light emitting elements 12a located on the left side in FIG. 44 are lit.
  • These lighting patterns are just examples. For example, by sequentially lighting up four consecutively arranged light emitting elements 12a among the 32 light emitting elements 12a, eight illumination directions can be realized. Omnidirectional illumination is realized by lighting all 32 light emitting elements 12a. Note that in order to reduce the brightness by half, the light emitting elements 12a may be turned on every other light emitting element 12a.
  • FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example of gloss reduction processing.
  • the image data 401a is image data acquired by the main camera 11 by illuminating the inspection object from the illumination direction i.
  • the image data 401b is image data acquired by the main camera 11 by illuminating the inspection object from the illumination direction ii.
  • the image data 401c is image data acquired by the main camera 11 by illuminating the inspection object from the illumination direction iii.
  • the image data 401d is image data acquired by the main camera 11 by illuminating the inspection object from the illumination direction iv.
  • the MCU 20 or MCU 30 creates a reduced gloss image 402 by combining the four image data 401a to 401d, and counts colonies in the reduced gloss image 402.
  • the MCU 20 or MCU 30 sequentially selects pixels located at the same coordinates in the four image data 401a to 401d as the pixel of interest. Assuming that the coordinates are x, y, the pixel of interest Pa (x, y) in the image data 401a, the pixel of interest Pb (x, y) in the image data 401b, the pixel of interest Pc (x, y) in the image data 401c, and , the pixel of interest Pd(x,y) in the image data 401d is extracted. Among these pixels, pixels causing halation are not used for composition.
  • the following benefits can be obtained by reducing gloss such as halation.
  • the MCUs 20 and 30 may count colonies after binarizing the inspection image (reduced gloss image). In this case, when the outline of the colony becomes clearer, the accuracy of counting the colonies improves.
  • the MCUs 20 and 30 can count colonies with gloss from the omnidirectional illumination image and count colonies without gloss from the reduced gloss image. In other words, it is possible to classify colonies with gloss and colonies without gloss.
  • the MCUs 20 and 30 may generate the omnidirectional illumination image by adding and combining the four image data 401a to 401d.
  • the MCUs 20 and 30 binarize the pixel area where a colony exists (colony area) in the gloss-reduced image, and compare the binarized area and the corresponding area in the omnidirectional illumination image (non-glossy-reduced image). They may be superimposed and the ratio of gloss present on the colony area may be displayed. Furthermore, the MCUs 20 and 30 may calculate the proportion (ratio) of the glossy area in the colony area. The MCUs 20 and 30 may classify the colony area as a gloss colony if the gloss ratio exceeds the threshold value. The MCUs 20 and 30 may classify the colony area as a non-glossy colony if the gloss ratio is less than or equal to the threshold value. Note that when the colony is shiny, it means that the colony is growing in the height direction. That is, the MCUs 20 and 30 can count colonies that have grown in the height direction.
  • FIG. 46 shows an image generated by superimposing a non-glossy image on a glossy-reduced image. Solid rectangles indicate non-glossy colonies. Dashed lines indicate shiny colonies. In this way, the MCUs 20 and 30 can discover colonies that have grown in the height direction.
  • FIG. 47 shows the count setting UI 410.
  • the count setting UI 410 has a menu 411 for selecting the type of medium.
  • Menu 411 includes bacterial species classification evaluation.
  • the MCU 30 may check the check box 420 to enable ring removal (glossy reduction processing) without waiting for additional instructions from the user. The user can turn on (check)/off (uncheck) the check box 420 by operating the pointer 57.
  • the MCU 30 disables the gloss reduction process (glossy reduction mode) and enables the non-glossy reduction process (non-glossy reduction mode). In this way, the MCU 30 may select the gloss reduction mode or the non-glossy reduction mode depending on the type of medium.
  • MCU 30 may temporarily shift to gloss reduction mode.
  • the MCU 30 sets a lighting pattern i on the ring lighting device 12, causes the main camera 11 to photograph the specimen to be inspected, and obtains image data 401a.
  • the MCU 30 sets the lighting pattern ii on the ring illumination device 12, causes the main camera 11 to photograph the specimen to be inspected, and acquires image data 401b.
  • the MCU 30 sets the lighting pattern iii on the ring illumination device 12, causes the main camera 11 to photograph the specimen to be inspected, and acquires image data 401c.
  • the MCU 30 sets a lighting pattern iv on the ring illumination device 12, causes the main camera 11 to photograph the specimen to be inspected, and obtains image data 401d.
  • the MCU 30 synthesizes the image data 401a to 401d to generate a reduced gloss image 402, and displays it in the result area 102.
  • the reduced gloss image 402 may be generated without waiting for explicit instructions from the user.
  • the gloss reduction image 402 would recommend enabling the gloss reduction process to the user. If the user is satisfied with the effect of the reduction process, he or she will keep the check box 420 checked. On the other hand, if the user is not satisfied with the effect of the reduction process, he or she will likely uncheck the checkbox 420.
  • the MCU 30 sends an omnidirectional illumination command to the ring illumination device 12 , applies omnidirectional illumination to the test specimen, causes the main camera 11 to take an image, acquires an omnidirectional illumination image, and displays the result area 102 as an omnidirectional illumination image. indicate.
  • the classification result area 430 displays the number of colonies counted for each classification. Class I is a shiny colony. Category II is yellow colonies. Class III is other colonies. The classification shown here is only an example.
  • the MCU 30 may display the non-glossy image 403, which is an omnidirectional illumination image, and the reduced gloss image 402 side by side in the result area 102. This will allow the user to easily confirm the effect of the gloss reduction process.
  • FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a colony counting method including gloss reduction processing. Although each step is described here as being executed by the MCU 30, some or all of the steps may be executed by the MCU 20.
  • the MCU 30 receives input of the type of medium.
  • the user operates the pointing device 33 to input the type of culture medium from the menu 411 in the count setting UI 410.
  • the type of medium may be, for example, a film-like medium.
  • the MCU 30 determines whether a shooting instruction has been input using the first software button 105a (first hardware button 8a) or the like. When the photographing instruction is input, the MCU 30 proceeds from S102 to S103.
  • the MCU 30 determines whether gloss reduction is necessary based on the type of medium specified or selected by the user. Note that the MCU 30 may determine whether gloss reduction is necessary based on the presence or absence of an explicit instruction by the user (eg, check box 420), without considering the type of medium.
  • the storage device 35 may store a determination table that associates the type of culture medium with the presence or absence of gloss reduction. In this case, the MCU 30 refers to the determination table and obtains the presence or absence of gloss reduction (glossy reduction mode/non-glossy reduction mode) associated with the type of culture medium. If gloss reduction is not necessary, the MCU 30 proceeds to S110 and executes photographing of the test individual using omnidirectional illumination. The MCU 30 acquires the omnidirectional illumination image 403 from the MCU 20 and stores it in the storage device 35. On the other hand, if gloss reduction is necessary, the MCU 30 proceeds to S104.
  • the MCU 30 transmits a lighting command to the head device 1a and sets the lighting direction of the ring lighting device 12. For example, lighting patterns i to iv are sequentially set in the head device 1a by a lighting command.
  • the MCU 20 lights the ring lighting device 12 in a lighting pattern specified by the lighting command.
  • the MCU 30 transmits a photographing command to the head device 1a, and executes photographing of the test individual illuminated from the specified illumination direction.
  • the MCU 20 receives the photographing command, photographs the specimen to be inspected according to the photographing command, generates image data, and transmits the image data to the MCU 30 .
  • the MCU 30 acquires image data from the MCU 20 and stores it in the storage device 35.
  • the MCU 30 determines whether the number of shots is sufficient. For example, if four image data 401a to 401d are required, the MCU 30 determines whether all four image data 401a to 401d have been acquired. If the number of shots is not sufficient, the MCU 30 returns to S104 and sets the next illumination direction on the head device 1a. This changes the illumination direction. On the other hand, if the number of shots is sufficient, the MCU 30 proceeds to S107.
  • the MCU 30 reads the image data 401a to 401d from the storage device 35 and combines them to generate the reduced gloss image 402.
  • the MCU 30 counts colonies from the inspection image (the reduced gloss image 402 or the omnidirectional illumination image 403).
  • FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a colony classification method. Although each step is described here as being executed by the MCU 30, some or all of the steps may be executed by the MCU 20.
  • MCU30 has omnidirectional illumination (standard illumination) Execute photographing of the test specimen.
  • the MCU 30 transmits an omnidirectional illumination command to the head device 1a, and also transmits a photographing command to the head device 1a.
  • the MCU 20 receives the omnidirectional illumination command, it simultaneously lights up the 32 light emitting elements 12a included in the ring illumination device 12, and irradiates the test object with illumination light from all illumination directions.
  • the MCU 20 upon receiving the photographing command, causes the main camera 11 to photograph the specimen to be inspected, generates image data, and transmits the image data (omnidirectional illumination image 403) to the MCU 30.
  • an omnidirectional illumination image 403 is obtained. Note that when the omnidirectional illumination image 403 is generated in a pseudo manner from a plurality of image data 401a to 401d each having a different illumination direction, S111 is omitted.
  • the MCU 30 executes shooting of the reduced gloss image 402.
  • the MCU 30 executes S104 to S107 shown in FIG. 49.
  • the MCU 30 counts colonies in the reduced gloss image 402. As a result, the pixel group (region) forming the colony is specified.
  • the MCU 30 stores position information indicating the position of a colony (information indicating which pixel is a colony) in the storage device 35.
  • the MCU 30 refers to the position information of the colony areas stored in the storage device 35 and selects one colony area.
  • the MCU 30 creates a histogram of the colony area using the omnidirectional illumination image 403. For example, the MCU 30 reads the coordinates of a plurality of pixels constituting the selected colony area from the storage device 35, and acquires the pixel value of the pixel corresponding to the read coordinates from the omnidirectional illumination image 403.
  • Omnidirectional illumination image 403 has no gloss reduction processing applied to it. Therefore, if the pixel of interest is a glossy pixel, the pixel of interest is a high-luminance pixel.
  • the MCU 30 may create a gloss histogram based on the pixel values of a plurality of pixels in the omnidirectional illumination image 403.
  • the MCU 30 determines the proportion (ratio) occupied by the glossy area within the colony area. For example, the MCU 30 may calculate the ratio by dividing the total number of pixels included in the glossy area by the total number of pixels included in the colony area.
  • the MCU 30 determines whether the proportion of the glossy area within the colony area exceeds a predetermined threshold. If the ratio exceeds the predetermined threshold, the MCU 30 proceeds to S118 and classifies the colony area as a glossy colony. On the other hand, if the ratio is below the predetermined threshold, the MCU 30 proceeds to S120 and classifies the colony area as a non-glossy colony.
  • the MCU 30 determines whether classification of all colony areas has been completed. If unclassified colony areas remain, the MCU 30 returns to S114 and selects the next colony area. As a result, classification is performed for the next colony area. On the other hand, if all colony areas have been classified, the MCU 30 ends the colony classification method.
  • the MCU 30 may display the type or name of each classification and the number of colonies for each classification in the classification result area 430. With this, the user will be able to easily check the count number for each category.
  • the storage device 35 is an example of a storage unit that stores a count table including cells into which the count results of each of a plurality of test individuals are input.
  • the MCU 30 and the display control unit 36 are examples of a display control unit that displays the count table stored in the storage unit on the display device 37.
  • the MCU 30, the pointing device 33, and the like are examples of a cell specifying section that specifies a target cell into which a count result is input from among a plurality of cells included in the count table displayed by the display control section.
  • MCU20 or MCU30 is an example of a counting instruction unit that generates counting instructions according to user operations.
  • the MCU 30 and the main camera 11 are an example of an acquisition unit that acquires an inspection image, which is an image of an individual to be inspected, based on the counting instruction generated by the counting instruction unit.
  • the MCU 20 or MCU 30 is an example of a counting unit that counts colonies included in the test individual based on the test image acquired by the acquisition unit.
  • the MCU 20 or 30 functions as a table management unit that reflects the number of colonies counted by the counting unit in the target cell. This reduces the burden on the user regarding post-processing of colony counting results.
  • the table management unit (e.g. MCU 30) is associated with an identification information cell that stores identification information of a test individual according to a user operation, and a count result of the number of colonies for the test individual.
  • a count table including count result cells to be stored may be created and the count table may be stored in the storage unit.
  • the count tables 55 and 82 are associated with identification information cells that store identification information (e.g. sample name) of the tested individual, and with the identification information cells, A count result cell storing a count result of the number of colonies may be included. This will save the user the trouble of creating a count table by hand.
  • the table management unit may associate test conditions with count result cells that store the count results of the number of colonies. By associating test conditions with cells in which count results are stored, test conditions can be easily set when testing colonies.
  • the acquisition unit includes an illumination unit that illuminates the inspection object (e.g. ring illumination devices 12, 13, coaxial illumination device 14), and an imaging unit that images the inspection object illuminated by the illumination unit (e.g. main camera).
  • the inspection conditions may include lighting conditions of the lighting section (eg, type of lighting, brightness). Appropriate lighting conditions differ depending on the type of bacteria, such as Escherichia coli or general viable bacteria, and the type of medium (e.g., sheet type medium, liquid type medium, selective type medium). Therefore, by including illumination conditions as inspection conditions, illumination conditions suitable for each cell can be set.
  • the inspection conditions may include imaging conditions (eg, exposure time) of the imaging unit. Appropriate imaging conditions may vary depending on the color of the medium and the color of the colony. By including the imaging conditions in the inspection conditions, it will be possible to set appropriate imaging conditions for each cell.
  • the illumination unit has a first illumination mode that epi-illuminates the inspected individual (e.g. a mode that lights up the ring illumination device 12), and a second illumination mode that transmits and illuminates the inspected individual from the direction opposite to the imaging unit. mode (eg, a mode in which the coaxial lighting device 14 is turned on).
  • the inspection conditions include selection of the first illumination mode or the second illumination mode. If the inspection conditions include the designation of the illumination mode, it will be possible to select an appropriate illumination mode for each cell.
  • the inspection conditions may include counting conditions applied to the counting section.
  • the counting conditions may include at least one of a threshold value for detecting colonies and a color serving as a reference when detecting colonies.
  • the counting conditions include a threshold value for distinguishing between colonies and others (e.g., a binarization threshold that affects detection sensitivity), and a color (e.g., foreground color, background color) that is the standard for counting colonies. color).
  • MCU20 or MCU30 may binarize the inspection image and count the number of colonies. Therefore, the binarization threshold affects the colony detection sensitivity. By appropriately setting the binarization threshold, false detection of colonies is reduced. Furthermore, if the color of the colony and the color of the medium can be appropriately set, false detection of colonies will be reduced. Setting counting conditions for each cell will reduce false detection of colonies for each cell. Furthermore, it will be possible to appropriately adjust the counting algorithm depending on the counting conditions.
  • the counting unit may output an illumination command according to the inspection condition associated with the target cell to the illumination unit.
  • the illumination unit illuminates the inspection object according to the illumination command.
  • the imaging unit generates an inspection image by capturing an image of the inspection object illuminated by the illumination unit according to the illumination command.
  • the counting unit counts the number of colonies based on the inspection image in which the illumination command is reflected. This makes it possible to count the number of colonies in an inspection image that reflects the inspection conditions set for each cell.
  • the counting unit changes the inspection condition applied to the acquisition unit to be associated with the first cell.
  • the first test condition associated with the second cell is changed to the second test condition associated with the second cell.
  • Appropriate test conditions may vary for each cell, that is, for each individual to be tested. If appropriate inspection conditions are set for each cell in advance, the user will be able to select appropriate inspection conditions simply by selecting a cell.
  • the sample DB 40 is a database for assisting the creation of the count tables 55 and 82.
  • the MCU 30 may function as a registration unit that registers data in a database.
  • the count tables 55 and 82 may have a plurality of row elements each including an identification information cell and a count result cell.
  • the registration unit (MCU 30) may be configured to register row elements included in the count table 82 whose count results are input into count result cells in the database.
  • the row element includes a cell and a test condition associated with the cell.
  • the table management unit (MCU 30) may create a new count table based on a row element specified by the user among a plurality of row elements held in the database.
  • cells constituting a row element specified by the user and inspection conditions associated with the cells are copied to a new count table. Further, the count result stored in the cell may be deleted when being registered in the sample DB 40. In this way, by creating a database of row elements that can be adopted as row elements of a count table in advance, the user can easily create a new count table.
  • the count tables 55 and 82 may have multiple column elements.
  • Each of the plurality of column elements may be associated with a combination.
  • the combination is a combination of the culture conditions (eg, dilution ratio, culture time) of the test individual and the bacterial species (eg, common viable bacteria, Escherichia coli).
  • Each column element has a different combination of culture conditions and bacterial species.
  • the first row element and the second row element are different in at least one of culture conditions and bacterial species. This would make it possible to group cells corresponding to a plurality of combinations of various culture conditions and various bacterial species into one row for a certain test individual.
  • the table management unit determines whether the row element specified by the user (designated row element) among the multiple row elements held in the database is included in the new count table. It may be determined whether If it is determined that the designated row element is not included in the count table, the MCU 30 may determine whether the designated row element includes a cell of a new column element that is not included in the count table. If it is determined that the designated row element includes a cell of a new column element, the MCU 30 adds the new column element to a new count table. On the other hand, if the specified row element is already included in the count table, or if the specified row element does not include a cell of a new column element, the column element is not added to the count table. As a result, duplication of row elements and duplication of column elements in the table will be suppressed, and the table will be made more compact.
  • the database may include a plurality of row elements in which a parent-child relationship is defined.
  • the parent-child relationship may be such that the finished product is the parent and the ingredients constituting the finished product are the children.
  • a certain finished product eg, sandwich
  • its ingredients eg, ham, lettuce
  • the table management unit (eg, MCU 30) may add a plurality of row elements with defined parent-child relationships to a new count table all at once. This will further reduce the burden on the user when creating the count table.
  • the table management unit e.g. MCU 30
  • the display control unit may display the inspection image and the count table side by side (simultaneously in parallel) on the display device 37.
  • the cell specifying unit eg, MCU 30
  • the display control unit may cause the display device to display a count table in which the number of colonies counted by the counting unit is reflected in the target cell together with the inspection image. This will make it easier to select the cell in which the count result is stored.
  • the display control unit e.g. MCU 30
  • a first control object e.g. tab 123
  • a second control object e.g. tab 124
  • the display control unit detects a user operation on the first control object (e.g., tab 123)
  • the display control unit e.g., MCU 30
  • displays a setting screen e.g., confirmation screen 110 for setting lighting conditions on the display device. You may.
  • the display control unit e.g., MCU 30
  • the display control unit detects a user operation on the second control object (e.g., tab 124)
  • the display control unit e.g., MCU 30
  • displays a setting screen e.g., setting screen 120 for setting counting conditions on the display device. Good too.
  • the display control unit e.g. MCU 30
  • a third control object e.g. first software button 105a
  • a fourth control object e.g., second software button 105b
  • the display control unit When the display control unit (e.g. MCU 30) detects a user operation on the third control object, the display control unit (e.g. MCU 30) converts the third control object from the control object (e.g. count button) for instructing counting to the acquisition unit. It may be assigned to a control object (eg, a shooting button, a reshooting button) for instructing the acquisition of an inspection image. That is, the MCU 30 may change the command issued by operating the third control object from a command for instructing counting to a command for instructing acquisition of a test image. This reduces the number of operable buttons, allowing the user to easily determine what to operate now.
  • the control object e.g. count button
  • the MCU 30 may change the command issued by operating the third control object from a command for instructing counting to a command for instructing acquisition of a test image. This reduces the number of operable buttons, allowing the user to easily determine what to operate now.
  • FIG. 18 when the third control object is assigned to a control object (e.g. count button) for instructing counting, the display control unit (e.g. MCU 30) A fourth control object (eg, registration button) may be displayed so as not to accept operations.
  • a counting result is obtained.
  • the display control unit e.g., MCU 30
  • assigns a third control object to a control object e.g., shooting button
  • the fourth control object eg, registration button
  • the fourth control object when a command for instructing counting is assigned to the third control object, the fourth control object may be displayed so as not to accept user operations. Furthermore, when the third control object to which a command for instructing counting is assigned is operated and the count result is obtained, the third control object is configured to instruct the obtaining unit to obtain the inspection image. The display of the fourth control object may be changed so that the command is assigned to the fourth control object and accepts a user operation. This will allow the user to easily determine what to operate now.
  • the display control unit e.g. MCU 30 registers the count result in the target cell when the fourth control object (e.g. registration button) is operated. , the fourth control object may be changed again so as not to accept user operations.
  • the cell specifying unit changes the target cell to the next cell.
  • the display control unit e.g. MCU 30
  • a third control object e.g. shooting button
  • a command for instructing the acquisition unit to acquire an inspection image is assigned.
  • a command for causing the acquisition unit to acquire the inspection image and instructing counting may be assigned to a third control object (eg, a count button). This will allow the user to easily determine what to operate now.
  • the head device 1 may further include, for example, a first hardware button and a second hardware button provided on the housing of the colony counting device.
  • the same function may be assigned to the first hardware button and the third control object, and the same function may be assigned to the second hardware button and the fourth control object. This would allow hardware buttons and software buttons to work together.
  • the user When the user is gazing at the petri dish 15 set in the head device 1, it becomes possible to input instructions using the hardware buttons of the head device 1. In other words, the user will be able to easily input instructions without looking at the display device 37 of the PC 1b and without operating the pointing device 33.
  • buttons when the user is gazing at the inspection image displayed on the PC 1b, shifting his/her gaze to a hardware button and pressing it will reduce work efficiency. Therefore, in this case, by displaying the software buttons on the display device 37, the user will be able to easily and accurately operate the buttons.
  • the application program 39 is an example of a program executed in a control device that controls the colony counting device.
  • the application program 39 causes the PC 1b to store a count table including cells into which the count results of each of the plurality of test individuals are input in the storage unit, displays the count table stored in the storage unit on the display device, and displays From among the multiple cells included in the count table displayed on the device, identify the target cell into which the count results will be input, obtain the test image that is the image of the test individual, and follow the counting instructions input by the user. , the number of colonies included in the test individual is acquired based on the test image acquired by the acquisition unit, and the number of colonies is reflected in the target cell.
  • a control method for controlling the colony counting device 1 includes: storing in a storage unit a count table including cells into which the count results of each of a plurality of test individuals are input; displaying the count table stored in the storage unit on a display device; Among the multiple cells included in the count table displayed on the display device, the target cell into which the count result will be input is identified, the test image that is the image of the test individual is obtained, and the data input by the user is counting the colonies included in the test individual based on the test image acquired by the acquisition unit according to the counting instructions provided by the acquisition unit; and reflecting the counted number of colonies in the target cell.
  • the storage device 35 functions as a storage unit that stores a count table including cells into which colony count results for the test individual are input, and identification information associated with the count table.
  • the MCU 30 and the MCU 20 function as an identification information acquisition unit that acquires the identification information from an identification image (eg, one-dimensional symbol, two-dimensional symbol) in which the identification information is encoded.
  • the MCU 30 functions as a table management unit that reads the count table associated with the identification information acquired by the acquisition unit from the storage unit.
  • the MCU 30 functions as a cell specifying section that specifies a target cell into which a count result is input from among a plurality of cells included in the count table read out by the table management section.
  • the MCU 20 or MCU 30 functions as a counting instruction unit that generates counting instructions according to user operations.
  • the main camera 11 functions as a first imaging section that generates a test image, which is an image of the test object, based on the counting instruction generated by the counting instruction section.
  • the MCU 20 or MCU 30 functions as a counting unit that counts colonies included in the tested individual based on the test image generated by the first imaging unit.
  • the table management unit eg, MCU 30
  • the identification information acquisition unit may be configured to acquire identification information from an identification image captured by the first imaging unit (eg, main camera 11).
  • the imaging unit that images the test individual may also be used as the imaging unit that images the identification image.
  • the identification information acquisition section may include a second imaging section.
  • the front camera 10 is an example of a second imaging unit that captures an identification image.
  • the identification information acquisition unit (eg, MCU 20, 30) may be configured to acquire identification information from the identification image captured by the second imaging unit.
  • the second imaging unit (e.g., front camera 10) captures the appearance of the test object, the appearance of the test object packaged in a package (e.g., packaging bag, product package), and the information printed on the package.
  • the device may be configured to capture an additional image that is at least one of the added information.
  • the storage unit (eg, storage device 35) may store at least one of an additional image and additional information acquired from the additional image in association with the target cell.
  • the count table may have cells into which count results are input and cells in which images and the like can be stored (eg, notes cells, free column cells).
  • additional images eg, product appearance
  • additional information eg, product code
  • the count table may include additional cells (eg, notes cells, free column cells) that hold at least one of an additional image and additional information. By referring to the additional information or the additional image held in the additional cell, the user will be able to easily understand which test individual the count results are for.
  • additional cells eg, notes cells, free column cells
  • the MCU 30 and the pointer 57 may function as a selection unit that selects one additional cell from a plurality of additional cells present in the count table. Furthermore, the MCU 30 may function as an additional information registration unit that registers at least one of an additional image and additional information in one additional cell selected by the selection unit. This allows the user to register additional images and additional information for desired cells in the count table.
  • the MCU 30 may function as an acquisition unit that acquires identification information (eg, sample name, petri dish number) of the test individual associated with the target cell.
  • the storage unit may be configured to store an inspection image of the inspection individual captured by the first imaging unit in response to a counting instruction input by the user in association with identification information of the inspection individual.
  • identification information eg, sample name, petri dish number
  • the storage unit may be configured to store an inspection image of the inspection individual captured by the first imaging unit in response to a counting instruction input by the user in association with identification information of the inspection individual.
  • it has required a lot of man-hours to correctly record the relationship between an inspection image and an inspection individual.
  • it is conceivable to acquire test images with a digital camera but in this case, it would be necessary to manually link the test images and the identification information of the test individual.
  • manual linking may cause human error.
  • the MCU 30 identifies the target cell and associates the inspection image of the inspection individual with the identification information of the inspection individual associated with the target cell. Therefore, the number of items conventionally required by the user is reduced, and it becomes possible to correctly record the relationship between the inspection image of the inspection individual and the identification information of the inspection individual.
  • the MCU 30 functions as a report generation unit that generates a report including the identification information of the tested individual, the number of colonies counted by the counting unit, and the inspection image of the tested individual. It may work. With this, the user will be able to intuitively understand which sample the measurement result is.
  • Unique cell identification information may be given to the cell into which the number of colonies is input in the count table.
  • the MCU 30 may use the printer 38 to print an identification image 221 that encodes unique cell identification information on a sticker 270 (resin or paper with an adhesive surface).
  • the user attaches a sticker 270 to the side of the Petri dish 15.
  • the petri dish number may be used as unique cell identification information.
  • the identification information acquisition unit eg, MCU 30, front camera 10, or main camera 11
  • the cell identification unit eg, MCU 30
  • the cell identification unit may identify the target cell based on the cell identification information acquired by the identification information acquisition unit. This saves the user the trouble of specifying the target cell. Furthermore, the target cell corresponding to the test individual will be accurately identified.
  • the identification information acquisition unit may acquire user authentication information using the first imaging unit or the second imaging unit. This will make it possible to omit a dedicated camera or code reader for user authentication.
  • the identification information acquisition unit e.g. MCU 30, front camera 10 or main camera 11 acquires identification information from the identification image printed on the print medium (e.g. inspection list 220).
  • the information may be configured to be obtained.
  • the MCU 30 may function as a data creation unit that creates test list data that includes a count table and identification information associated with the count table.
  • the identification information acquisition unit eg, MCU 30, front camera 10, or main camera 11
  • the identification information acquisition unit may be configured to acquire identification information from an identification image displayed on the terminal device 1c. This makes it possible to reduce paper media.
  • the communication circuit 34 is an example of a communication unit that communicates with the terminal device 1c and transmits an identification image to the terminal device 1c.
  • the MCU 30 may function as a creation unit that creates a count table in response to user operations and stores the count table in the storage unit.
  • the creation unit (eg, MCU 30) may associate test conditions with cells that store the result of counting the number of colonies.
  • the first imaging unit may be configured to image the individual to be inspected according to inspection conditions (eg, exposure time, type of illumination, brightness).
  • the colony counting device 1 may further include a housing (eg, upper unit 2, support unit 3, and lower unit 4) having a first imaging section.
  • a housing eg, upper unit 2, support unit 3, and lower unit 4 having a first imaging section.
  • the casing includes a stage 5 that holds a petri dish 15 containing test specimens, a lighting section (e.g. ring lighting devices 12, 13, coaxial lighting device 14) that illuminates the test specimens, and a counting instruction input by the user. It may also include a reception unit (eg, first hardware button 8a) that accepts the request.
  • a lighting section e.g. ring lighting devices 12, 13, coaxial lighting device 14
  • a counting instruction input by the user may also include a reception unit (eg, first hardware button 8a) that accepts the request.
  • the colony counting device 1 may further include a housing (eg, upper unit 2, support unit 3, and lower unit 4) that includes a first imaging section and a second imaging section.
  • the casing includes a stage 5 that holds a petri dish 15 containing test specimens, a lighting section (e.g. ring lighting devices 12, 13, coaxial lighting device 14) that illuminates the test specimens, and a counting instruction input by the user.
  • It may also include a reception unit (eg, first hardware button 8a) that accepts the request.
  • the housing may have a recess 4a.
  • the second imaging unit eg, front camera 10) may be placed in the recess.
  • the reception section (eg, first hardware button 8a) may be arranged in an operation section (operation section 8) between the stage and the recess. This makes it possible to easily input counting instructions.
  • the reception unit (eg, first hardware button 8a) receives an imaging instruction when the colony counting device 1 is in the first state
  • the first imaging unit may perform imaging. If the reception unit receives an imaging instruction while the colony counting device 1 is in a second state different from the first state, the second imaging unit may perform imaging. This makes it possible to instruct different imaging units to capture images even though the same operation is performed on a single reception unit.
  • the first state is, for example, a state in which a count table has already been specified.
  • the second state is, for example, a state where the count table has not yet been specified.
  • FIG. 1 A program executed in a processor that controls a colony counting device, which provides a count table including cells into which colony count results for test individuals are input, and an identification associated with the count table.
  • information in a storage unit, acquire the identification information from an identification image in which the identification information is encoded, and read out the count table associated with the acquired identification information from the storage unit.
  • the target cell into which the count result will be input from among the plurality of cells included in the read count table, specify the target cell into which the count result will be input, generate a counting instruction according to the user's operation, and based on the generated counting instruction Generate a test image that is an image of the test individual, count the colonies included in the test individual based on the generated test image, and reflect the counted number of colonies in the specified target cell. .
  • a control method executed in a processor that controls a colony counting device which includes a count table including cells into which colony count results for test individuals are input, and identification information associated with the count table.
  • a storage unit acquiring the identification information from an identification image in which the identification information is encoded, and reading out the count table associated with the acquired identification information from the storage unit. and identifying a target cell into which a count result will be input from among the plurality of cells included in the read count table; generating a counting instruction according to the user's operation; generating a test image, which is an image of the test individual, based on the counting instruction, counting colonies included in the test individual based on the generated test image; reflecting the number of colonies counted.
  • the ring illumination device 12 is an example of a lighting unit that illuminates the inspection object. Further, the ring illumination device 12 is an example of an illumination unit that illuminates the inspection object from one of a plurality of different illumination directions. The ring illumination device 12 is an example of an illumination unit that illuminates the inspection object by switching the illumination direction.
  • the main camera 11 is an example of an imaging unit that photographs the inspection object illuminated by the illumination unit and generates image data. Further, the main camera 11 is an example of an imaging unit that photographs the test specimen illuminated by the illumination unit from a specified illumination direction among a plurality of illumination directions, and generates a plurality of first image data for each illumination direction. be.
  • MCU20 and MCU30 are examples of control units that control the illumination unit and the imaging unit.
  • the MCU 20 and the MCU 30 sequentially switch the illumination direction of the illumination unit to cause the imaging unit to photograph the inspection individual illuminated by the illumination unit, and perform imaging so as to generate a plurality of first image data each having a different illumination direction for the inspection individual.
  • This is an example of a control section that controls the section.
  • the storage device 35 is an example of a storage unit that stores image data (eg, a plurality of first image data).
  • the MCU 20 or MCU 30 is an example of an image generation unit that generates an inspection image with reduced gloss from image data stored in a storage unit.
  • the MCU 20 or MCU 30 synthesizes a plurality of pieces of first image data (e.g., image data 401a to 401d) stored in the storage unit to generate an inspection image with reduced gloss (e.g., reduced gloss 402).
  • MCU20 or MCU30 functions as a counting unit that counts colonies included in the inspection image.
  • the control unit e.g. MCU 20, MCU 30
  • a plurality of first image data are stored.
  • the image generation unit e.g.
  • MCU 20, 30 sequentially selects a plurality of pixels that will constitute the inspection image as the pixel of interest, and selects each of the pixels of interest from the plurality of first image data. Reads the pixel value of the pixel at the coordinates corresponding to , determines the pixel value with suppressed gloss based on the multiple read pixel values, and determines the determined pixel value as the pixel value of the target pixel in the inspection image. do.
  • the image generation unit when generating an inspection image with reduced gloss based on a plurality of first image data having different illumination directions for each individual to be inspected, sets the pixel value of each pixel of the inspection image to A pixel value with reduced gloss is determined based on the pixel value of the pixel of the plurality of corresponding first image data. This reduces gloss and improves colony counting accuracy.
  • the counting unit (e.g. MCU 20, 30) operates in a gloss reduction mode in which colonies are counted from the inspection image (e.g. gloss reduction image 402) generated by applying gloss reduction processing in the image generation unit; It may operate according to either a gloss non-reduction mode in which colonies are counted from an inspection image to which no reduction processing has been applied (eg, omnidirectional illumination image 403). This makes it possible to provide the user with both an image to which the gloss reduction process has been applied and an image to which the gloss reduction process has not been applied.
  • the illumination unit is configured to simultaneously illuminate the inspection object from a plurality of illumination directions, and the imaging unit illuminates the inspection object simultaneously illuminated by the illumination unit from a plurality of illumination directions.
  • the storage unit is configured to capture the second image data (e.g. omnidirectional illumination image 403), and the storage unit is configured to store the second image data. It may be configured to count colonies included in two image data.
  • the non-gloss reduction mode may also be called a normal mode or a standard mode.
  • the illumination section is configured to illuminate the inspection object from a specified illumination direction among a plurality of illumination directions
  • the imaging section is configured to illuminate the inspection object illuminated by the illumination section.
  • the image generator is configured to capture a plurality of first image data and generate a plurality of first image data for each illumination direction
  • the storage unit is configured to store the plurality of first image data
  • the image generation unit is configured to: It is configured to synthesize the plurality of first image data stored in the storage unit to generate second image data corresponding to image data of the test individual illuminated simultaneously from a plurality of illumination directions
  • the unit may be configured to store the second image data
  • the counting unit may be configured to count colonies included in the second image data.
  • the omnidirectional illumination image 403 may be created in a pseudo manner from a plurality of image data 401a to 401d each having a different illumination direction. This will make it possible to reduce the number of shots taken.
  • the count setting UI 410 and the MCU 30 are examples of a reception unit that accepts input of the type of culture medium.
  • the MCU 30 is an example of a selection unit that selects a gloss reduction mode or a non-glossy reduction mode according to the type of culture medium accepted by the reception unit. In this way, the user only has to select the type of medium, and the mode suitable for the medium will be selected. This will make it possible to eliminate individual counting habits and improve the accuracy of colony counting.
  • the storage unit (eg, storage device 35) may be configured to store a gloss reduction mode or a non-glossy reduction mode in association with each of a plurality of culture medium types.
  • the selection unit (eg, MCU 30) may select the gloss reduction mode or non-glossy reduction mode associated with the type of culture medium accepted by the reception unit by referring to the storage unit. In this way, the correspondence between the type of culture medium and the mode may be stored in advance.
  • the MCU 30 may function as a registration unit that registers whether to associate gloss reduction mode or non-glossy reduction mode with each of a plurality of culture medium types according to user operations. .
  • the MCU 30 may display a user interface for registration on the display device 37, and may associate a mode with a type of culture medium in accordance with a user operation on the user interface. For example, a user experienced in counting colonies will know the appropriate mode for each medium. If such a user executes the registration process, the same count result will be obtained even if another user executes the test. In other words, colony counting accuracy is improved.
  • the counting unit (eg, MCU 20, 30) may be configured to count the number of colonies in both the gloss reduction mode and the non-glossy reduction mode.
  • the MCU 30 may display the number of colonies acquired in both the gloss reduction mode and the non-glossy reduction mode on the display device 37. This may allow the user to confirm the effectiveness of the gloss reduction process.
  • the counting unit e.g. MCU 20, 30
  • the counting unit is configured to detect colonies in the gloss reduction mode, and detects colonies acquired by the imaging unit in the non-glossy reduction mode.
  • the type of the detected colony may be classified based on the pixel value of the pixel corresponding to the detected colony in the second image data. By classifying the type of colony, the user will be able to easily know what type of colony has grown.
  • the counting unit e.g. MCU 20, 30
  • obtains a histogram from the second image data for the pixel corresponding to the detected colony and based on the histogram, calculates the number of pixels corresponding to the detected colony.
  • Colonies that appear may be classified as shiny colonies or non-shiny colonies. Histograms often show characteristics of colonies. Therefore, by focusing on the histogram, glossy colonies and non-glossy colonies can be more accurately classified.
  • the counting unit (eg, MCU 20, 30) may be configured to count both glossy colonies and non-glossy colonies. Thereby, the user will be able to grasp the number of colonies that are likely to grow in the height direction and the number of colonies that are difficult to grow in the height direction.
  • a colony counting method for example, involves switching the illumination direction and illuminating the test specimen with the illumination section, then photographing the test specimen illuminated by the illumination section with the imaging section and generating image data, and sequentially switching the illumination direction. Controlling the imaging unit to cause the imaging unit to photograph the inspection individual illuminated by the illumination unit to generate a plurality of first image data each having a different illumination direction for the inspection individual; When generating an inspection image with reduced gloss based on a plurality of different first image data, the pixel value of each pixel of the inspection image is determined by the pixel value of each pixel of the plurality of first image data corresponding to each pixel. The method includes determining a pixel value with reduced gloss based on the pixel value, and counting colonies included in the inspection image.
  • programs eg, control program 27, application program 39
  • This program switches the illumination direction and illuminates the test specimen with the illumination unit, the imaging unit photographs the test specimen illuminated by the illumination unit and generates image data, and the illumination direction is sequentially switched and the test specimen is illuminated by the illumination unit.
  • Controlling the imaging unit so as to cause the imaging unit to photograph the illuminated test individual and generate a plurality of first image data each having a different illumination direction for the test individual;
  • the pixel value of each pixel of the plurality of first image data corresponding to each pixel is used as the pixel value of each pixel of the inspection image.
  • a computer is caused to determine a pixel value with reduced gloss based on the test image, and to count colonies included in the inspection image.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Sustainable Development (AREA)
  • Apparatus Associated With Microorganisms And Enzymes (AREA)

Abstract

[Problem] To increase an accuracy of counting colonies. [Solution] Provided is a colony counting device which uses an imaging unit to image each inspection individual illuminated by sequentially switching an illumination direction of an illumination unit to generate a plurality of pieces of image data having the illumination directions different from one another for the inspection individual, determines a pixel value reduced in gloss on the basis of pixel values of pixels of a plurality of pieces of first image data corresponding to this pixel as a pixel value of each pixel of an inspection image reduced in gloss when the inspection image is to be generated on the basis of the first image data, and counts colonies included in the inspection image.

Description

コロニー計数装置、制御方法およびプログラムColony counting device, control method and program
本発明は、コロニー計数装置、制御方法およびプログラムに関する。 The present invention relates to a colony counting device, a control method, and a program.
食品を製造する工場ではコロニーカウンタを用いて菌が商品に混入しているかどうかが検査される。検査者は、シャーレ内に培地を形成し、培地に食品サンプルを投入し、所定期間にわたり培養器等で培養する。その後、検査者は、培養器からシャーレを取り出して、コロニーカウンタでコロニー（細菌の群体）をカウントする。このようにコロニーカウンタのカウント精度は食品の衛生管理上で重要である。特許文献１によれば、同一種類の多数のコロニーを安定して釣菌するために、それぞれ照明方向が異なる複数の照明画像を取得し、複数の照明画像を比較することで培地上のほぼすべてのコロニーを顕在化することが提案されている。 At food manufacturing factories, colony counters are used to test whether bacteria are present in the products. The inspector forms a culture medium in a petri dish, puts a food sample into the culture medium, and incubates it in an incubator or the like for a predetermined period of time. Thereafter, the examiner takes out the petri dish from the incubator and counts colonies (bacterial colonies) using a colony counter. In this way, the counting accuracy of colony counters is important for food hygiene control. According to Patent Document 1, in order to stably catch a large number of colonies of the same type, a plurality of illumination images each having a different illumination direction are acquired, and by comparing the plurality of illumination images, almost all of the colonies on the culture medium can be harvested. It has been proposed to make colonies of
特開２０１１－１０３７８６号公報JP2011-103786A
ところで、照明装置の種類によっては、コロニーを撮影して取得された検査画像にハレーションが発生してしまうことがある。ハレーションは、検査画像に白飛び画素（画素値が最大値に飽和した画素）を発生させるため、コロニーを正確に計数することが困難となる。そこで、本発明は、コロニーの計数精度を向上させることを目的とする。 By the way, depending on the type of illumination device, halation may occur in an inspection image obtained by photographing a colony. Halation causes blown-out pixels (pixels whose pixel values are saturated to the maximum value) in the inspection image, making it difficult to accurately count colonies. Therefore, an object of the present invention is to improve colony counting accuracy.
本発明は、たとえば、　照明方向を切り替えて検査個体を照明する照明部と、　前記照明部により照明された検査個体を撮影し、画像データを生成する撮像部と、　前記照明部の照明方向を順次切り替えて前記照明部により照明された検査個体を、前記撮像部により撮影させて、前記検査個体についてそれぞれ照明方向が異なる複数の第一画像データを生成させるよう前記撮像部を制御する制御部と、　前記検査個体についてそれぞれ照明方向が異なる前記複数の第一画像データに基づいて光沢の低減された検査画像を生成する際に、当該検査画像の各画素の画素値として、当該各画素に対応する当該複数の第一画像データの画素の画素値に基づき光沢の低減された画素値を決定する画像生成部と、　前記検査画像に含まれるコロニーを計数する計数部と、を有するコロニー計数装置を提供する。 The present invention provides, for example, an illumination section that illuminates an inspection object by switching the illumination direction, an imaging section that photographs the inspection object illuminated by the illumination section and generates image data, and a lighting section that sequentially changes the illumination direction of the illumination section. a control unit that controls the imaging unit to cause the imaging unit to photograph the inspection individual that has been switched and illuminated by the illumination unit, and to generate a plurality of first image data each having a different illumination direction for the inspection individual; When generating an inspection image with reduced gloss based on the plurality of first image data having different illumination directions for the inspection individual, the pixel value of each pixel of the inspection image is set as the pixel value of each pixel of the inspection image. Provided is a colony counting device having an image generation unit that determines a pixel value with reduced gloss based on the pixel values of pixels of a plurality of first image data, and a counting unit that counts colonies included in the inspection image. .
本発明によれば、コロニーの計数精度が向上する。 According to the present invention, colony counting accuracy is improved.
コロニー計数装置を示す図。A diagram showing a colony counting device. ヘッド装置の構造を説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the structure of a head device. ヘッド装置の電気的な構成を説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the electrical configuration of a head device. 制御装置の電気的な構成を説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the electrical configuration of a control device. ユーザインタフェース（ＵＩ）を説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a user interface (UI). サンプルデータベースからカウント表を作成するＵＩを説明する図。The figure explaining UI which creates a count table from a sample database. サンプル名の入力補助に関するＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI related to sample name input assistance. 新規にカウント表を作成するＵＩを説明する図。The figure explaining UI which creates a new count table. 表計算ソフトのシートを説明する図。A diagram explaining a sheet of spreadsheet software. 過去のカウント表を流用するためのＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI for reusing past count tables. 統計処理の設定を容易化するＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI that facilitates setting of statistical processing. 統計処理の設定を容易化するＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI that facilitates setting of statistical processing. 親子関係に関するＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI related to parent-child relationships. 親子関係に関するＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI related to parent-child relationships. 列要素を追加するためのＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI for adding column elements. 検査時のＵＩを説明する図。The figure explaining UI at the time of an inspection. 検査条件等を変更するＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI for changing inspection conditions and the like. カウントを指示する際のＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI when instructing a count. カウント結果をセルに登録する際のＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a UI when registering count results in a cell. 対象セルの自動特定を示すＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI that shows automatic identification of a target cell. カウント結果の単位を切り替えるＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI for switching units of count results. セルに表示する情報を切り替えるＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI for switching information displayed in a cell. 計数条件を再設定するＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI for resetting counting conditions. ボタンへの機能の割り当ての遷移を説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the transition of assignment of functions to buttons. 検査条件等を変更するためのＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a UI for changing inspection conditions and the like. 過去に作成されたカウント表を呼び出すＵＩを説明する図。The figure explaining the UI which calls the count table created in the past. 検査リストを説明する図。A diagram explaining an inspection list. ユーザ認証札を説明する図。A diagram explaining a user authentication tag. 自由列のセルへ情報を登録するＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a UI for registering information in a free column cell. 自由列のセルへ情報を登録するＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a UI for registering information in a free column cell. コード（シンボル）の読み取りＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a code (symbol) reading UI. シンボルのデコード結果を説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating symbol decoding results. レポートを説明する図。A diagram explaining a report. ＰＣにより実行される処理を示すフローチャート。5 is a flowchart showing processing executed by a PC. ヘッド装置により実行される処理を示すフローチャート。5 is a flowchart showing processing executed by the head device. サンプルデータベースの編集を示すフローチャート。Flowchart showing editing a sample database. カウント表の編集を説明するフローチャート。A flowchart explaining editing of a count table. カウント表の特定を説明するフローチャート。A flowchart illustrating identification of a count table. コロニーのカウント方法を説明するフローチャート。Flowchart explaining how to count colonies. 自由列のセルへ情報を登録する方法を説明するフローチャート。A flowchart illustrating a method of registering information to cells in a free column. シャーレに付与された識別画像を説明する図。The figure explaining the identification image given to the petri dish. 培地の種別ごとのハレーションの有無を説明する図。A diagram illustrating the presence or absence of halation for each type of culture medium. リング照明装置における発光素子の配置を説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the arrangement of light emitting elements in a ring lighting device. それぞれ異なる照明方向を実現する手法を説明する図。A diagram illustrating a method for realizing different illumination directions. 光沢低減処理を説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating gloss reduction processing. コロニー領域ごとの光沢の有無を説明する図。A diagram illustrating the presence or absence of gloss in each colony area. カウント設定ＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a count setting UI. カウント設定ＵＩを説明する図。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a count setting UI. 光沢低減処理を含むコロニーのカウント方法を示すフローチャート。Flowchart showing a colony counting method including gloss reduction treatment. 光沢に着目したコロニーの分類方法を示すフローチャート。A flowchart showing a method for classifying colonies based on gloss.
以下、添付図面を参照して実施形態を詳しく説明する。なお、以下の実施形態は特許請求の範囲に係る発明を限定するものではなく、また実施形態で説明されている特徴の組み合わせの全てが発明に必須のものとは限らない。実施形態で説明されている複数の特徴のうち二つ以上の特徴が任意に組み合わされてもよい。また、同一若しくは同様の構成には同一の参照番号を付し、重複した説明は省略する。　 Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. Note that the following embodiments do not limit the claimed invention, and not all combinations of features described in the embodiments are essential to the invention. Two or more features among the plurality of features described in the embodiments may be arbitrarily combined. In addition, the same or similar configurations are given the same reference numerals, and duplicate explanations will be omitted.　
［コロニー計数装置］　図１はコロニー計数装置１を示している。なお、コロニー計数装置１は、ヘッド装置１ａと、後述される制御装置（パーソナルコンピュータ（ＰＣ））１ｂとを含む。ヘッド装置１ａとＰＣ１ｂとは、たとえば、ユニバーサルシリアルバス（ＵＳＢ）ケーブルで有線接続されてもよいし、無線により接続されてもよい。　 [Colony counting device] FIG. 1 shows a colony counting device 1. Note that the colony counting device 1 includes a head device 1a and a control device (personal computer (PC)) 1b, which will be described later. The head device 1a and the PC 1b may be connected by wire using, for example, a universal serial bus (USB) cable, or may be connected wirelessly.　
ヘッド装置１ａは、上部ユニット２、支持ユニット３および下部ユニット４を有している。ヘッド装置１ａの内部には、カメラおよび照明装置が設けられている。支持ユニット３は、上部ユニット２と下部ユニット４との間に存在し、上部ユニット２を支持している。下部ユニット４の頂面にはステージ５が設けられている。ステージ５は、シャーレ１５が載置される透過窓６と、透過窓６の中央にシャーレ１５を位置決めするための位置決め部材７とが設けられている。下部ユニット４の正面には、操作部８とフロントカメラ１０が設けられている。操作部８は、ユーザが指示を入力するための複数のスイッチ（例：第一ハードウエアボタン８ａ、第二ハードウエアボタン８ｂ、第三ハードウエアボタン８ｃ）などを含む。フロントカメラ１０は、オプションであり、たとえば、二次元シンボル（バーコード）などを読み取る。フロントカメラ１０は、ヘッド装置１の筐体の前面に設けられた凹部４ａに、配置されている。下部ユニット４の側面には電源スイッチ９が設けられている。　 The head device 1a includes an upper unit 2, a support unit 3, and a lower unit 4. A camera and a lighting device are provided inside the head device 1a. The support unit 3 exists between the upper unit 2 and the lower unit 4 and supports the upper unit 2. A stage 5 is provided on the top surface of the lower unit 4. The stage 5 is provided with a transmission window 6 on which the Petri dish 15 is placed, and a positioning member 7 for positioning the Petri dish 15 at the center of the transmission window 6. An operating section 8 and a front camera 10 are provided on the front of the lower unit 4. The operation unit 8 includes a plurality of switches (eg, a first hardware button 8a, a second hardware button 8b, and a third hardware button 8c) for the user to input instructions. The front camera 10 is optional and reads, for example, two-dimensional symbols (barcodes). The front camera 10 is arranged in a recess 4a provided in the front of the housing of the head device 1. A power switch 9 is provided on the side surface of the lower unit 4.　
図２はヘッド装置１ａの断面図である。上部ユニット２の下面付近には、落射照明を行うためのリング照明装置１２が配置されている。落射照明とは、検査個体で反射した光を受光することで検査個体を観察するための照明手法である。リング照明装置１２の上方にはメインカメラ１１と光学系１６とが配置されている。透過窓６の下方にもリング照明装置１３が配置されている。リング照明装置１３のさらに下方には、同軸照明（全射照明）を行う同軸照明装置１４が配置されている。同軸照明（全射照明）は、透過照明とも呼ばれ、検査個体を透過してきた光を受光することで検査個体を観察する手法で利用される。リング照明装置１２は、リング状に並べられた複数の発光素子１２ａと、複数の発光素子１２ａから出力される光を拡散する拡散板１２ｂとを有している。同時に点灯する発光素子１２ａを選択することで、照明方向が自在に変更可能となっている。これは、それぞれ異なる方向から照明された検査個体（食品サンプル）を撮像して取得された複数の検査画像を合成する際に役立つであろう。リング照明装置１３は、リング状に並べられた複数の発光素子１３ａと、反射板１３ｂと、拡散板１３ｃとを有している。反射板１３ｂは、複数の発光素子１３ａから出力された光を拡散板１３ｃに向けて反射する。拡散板１３ｃは、反射板１３ｂからの光を均一に拡散する。複数の発光素子１３ａのうち同時に点灯する発光素子１３ａを選択することで、照明方向が自在に変更される。同軸照明装置１４は、同心円状またはアレイ状に並べられた複数の発光素子１４ａを有する。このように複数のタイプの照明装置を設け、食品サンプルと培地との組み合わせごとに適切な照明装置を選択することで、コロニーの個数を正確にカウントすることが可能となろう。　 FIG. 2 is a sectional view of the head device 1a. A ring illumination device 12 for providing epi-illumination is arranged near the bottom surface of the upper unit 2. Epi-illumination is an illumination method for observing a test object by receiving light reflected by the test object. A main camera 11 and an optical system 16 are arranged above the ring illumination device 12. A ring illumination device 13 is also arranged below the transmission window 6. Further below the ring illumination device 13, a coaxial illumination device 14 that performs coaxial illumination (total illumination) is arranged. Coaxial illumination (objective illumination) is also called transmitted illumination, and is used as a method of observing the test object by receiving light that has passed through the test object. The ring lighting device 12 includes a plurality of light emitting elements 12a arranged in a ring shape and a diffusion plate 12b that diffuses light output from the plurality of light emitting elements 12a. By selecting the light emitting elements 12a that light up at the same time, the illumination direction can be freely changed. This will be useful when combining a plurality of inspection images obtained by imaging an inspection object (food sample) illuminated from different directions. The ring lighting device 13 includes a plurality of light emitting elements 13a arranged in a ring shape, a reflection plate 13b, and a diffusion plate 13c. The reflecting plate 13b reflects the light output from the plurality of light emitting elements 13a toward the diffusing plate 13c. The diffusion plate 13c uniformly diffuses the light from the reflection plate 13b. By selecting the light emitting elements 13a that light up simultaneously from among the plurality of light emitting elements 13a, the illumination direction can be freely changed. The coaxial illumination device 14 has a plurality of light emitting elements 14a arranged in a concentric circle or an array. By providing multiple types of lighting devices in this manner and selecting an appropriate lighting device for each combination of food sample and culture medium, it will be possible to accurately count the number of colonies.　
図３はヘッド装置１ａの電気的構成を示している。ＭＣＵ２０は、記憶装置２５に記憶されている制御プログラム２７を実行し、制御プログラム２７にしたがってヘッド装置１ａを制御するプロセッサである。なお、ＭＣＵはマイクロコントローラユニットの略称である。ＭＣＵ２０は撮像制御部２１を介してメインカメラ１１およびフロントカメラ１０を制御し、様々な画像データを取得する。撮像制御部２１は、たとえば、メインカメラ１１の露光時間などを制御する。ＭＣＵ２０は、照明制御部２２を介してリング照明装置１２、１３および同軸照明装置１４を点灯させたり、消灯させたりする。照明制御部２２は、リング照明装置１２、１３および同軸照明装置１４に供給される駆動電力を制御する。ＭＣＵ２０は、操作受付部２３を介して操作部８から入力されるユーザ入力を受け付ける。操作受付部２３は、操作部８のスイッチ部の状態を示す信号を生成する入力回路などを含む。通信回路２４は、通信ケーブル２６を介して、図４に示されるＰＣ１ｂと通信する回路である。通信回路２４は、無線通信回路およびＬＡＮインタフェース回路を含んでもよい。ＬＡＮはローカルエリアネットワークの略称である。通信ケーブル２６は、たとえば、ＵＳＢケーブルであってもよい。記憶装置２５は、たとえば、制御プログラム２７を記憶するリードオンリメモリ（ＲＯＭ）と、ワークエリアとして利用されるランダムアクセスメモリ（ＲＡＭ）とを含む。記憶装置２５は、たとえば、ＰＣ１ｂにより設定された検査条件２８と、メインカメラ１１により取得された検査画像２９などを記憶してもよい。検査条件２８は、たとえば、照明条件や撮像条件、カウント条件などを含みうる。検査画像２９は、培地およびサンプルを含むシャーレ１５の画像である。　 FIG. 3 shows the electrical configuration of the head device 1a. The MCU 20 is a processor that executes a control program 27 stored in the storage device 25 and controls the head device 1a according to the control program 27. Note that MCU is an abbreviation for microcontroller unit. The MCU 20 controls the main camera 11 and the front camera 10 via the imaging control unit 21, and acquires various image data. The imaging control unit 21 controls, for example, the exposure time of the main camera 11. The MCU 20 turns on and off the ring lighting devices 12 and 13 and the coaxial lighting device 14 via the lighting control unit 22. The lighting control unit 22 controls the driving power supplied to the ring lighting devices 12 and 13 and the coaxial lighting device 14. The MCU 20 receives user input from the operation unit 8 via the operation reception unit 23 . The operation reception section 23 includes an input circuit that generates a signal indicating the state of the switch section of the operation section 8, and the like. The communication circuit 24 is a circuit that communicates with the PC 1b shown in FIG. 4 via the communication cable 26. Communication circuit 24 may include a wireless communication circuit and a LAN interface circuit. LAN is an abbreviation for local area network. Communication cable 26 may be, for example, a USB cable. The storage device 25 includes, for example, a read-only memory (ROM) that stores the control program 27 and a random access memory (RAM) that is used as a work area. The storage device 25 may store, for example, inspection conditions 28 set by the PC 1b, inspection images 29 acquired by the main camera 11, and the like. The inspection conditions 28 may include, for example, illumination conditions, imaging conditions, count conditions, and the like. The inspection image 29 is an image of the Petri dish 15 containing the culture medium and sample.　
図４は、ヘッド装置１ａを制御するＰＣ１ｂを示す。ＭＣＵ３０は、記憶装置３５に記憶されたプログラムを実行し、プログラムにしたがってＰＣ１ｂおよびヘッド装置１ａを制御するプロセッサである。ＭＣＵ３０は、入出力回路３１に接続されたキーボード３２およびポインティングデバイス３３からユーザの指示を受け付ける。ＭＣＵ３０は、入出力回路３１に接続されたプリンタ３８を制御し、表などを紙に印刷する。ＭＣＵ３０は、グラフィクスボードなどの表示制御部３６を介して、表示装置３７に様々な情報を表示する。通信回路３４は、通信ケーブル２６を介して、ヘッド装置１ａと通信する回路である。通信回路３４は、無線通信回路およびＬＡＮインタフェース回路を含んでもよい。記憶装置３５は、たとえば、プログラムを記憶する
リードオンリメモリ（ＲＯＭ）と、ワークエリアとして利用されるランダムアクセスメモリ（ＲＡＭ）とを含む。さらに、記憶装置３５は、ハードディスクドライブ（ＨＤＤ）およびソリッドステートドライブ（ＳＳＤ）を含んでもよい。記憶装置３５は、アプリケーションプログラム３９、検査条件２８、検査画像２９、サンプルＤＢ４０およびカウント表５５などを記憶してもよい。ＤＢはデータベースの略称である。アプリケーションプログラム３９は、たとえば、サンプルＤＢ４０およびカウント表５５の作成・編集、ヘッド装置１の制御などを担当する。検査条件２８は、アプリケーションプログラム３９にしたがって、ＭＣＵ３０により設定される。検査画像２９はヘッド装置１から受信される。サンプルＤＢ４０は、カウント表５５を作成する際に参照されるデータベースである。カウント表５５は、複数のセルがアレイ状に配置された表であり、行要素と列要素とを含む。　 FIG. 4 shows a PC 1b that controls the head device 1a. The MCU 30 is a processor that executes a program stored in the storage device 35 and controls the PC 1b and the head device 1a according to the program. The MCU 30 receives user instructions from the keyboard 32 and pointing device 33 connected to the input/output circuit 31. The MCU 30 controls a printer 38 connected to the input/output circuit 31 to print tables and the like on paper. The MCU 30 displays various information on a display device 37 via a display control unit 36 such as a graphics board. The communication circuit 34 is a circuit that communicates with the head device 1a via the communication cable 26. Communication circuit 34 may include a wireless communication circuit and a LAN interface circuit. The storage device 35 includes, for example, a read-only memory (ROM) that stores programs and a random access memory (RAM) that is used as a work area. Furthermore, storage device 35 may include a hard disk drive (HDD) and a solid state drive (SSD). The storage device 35 may store an application program 39, inspection conditions 28, inspection images 29, sample DB 40, count table 55, and the like. DB is an abbreviation for database. The application program 39 is in charge of, for example, creating and editing the sample DB 40 and the count table 55, controlling the head device 1, and the like. Inspection conditions 28 are set by MCU 30 according to application program 39. The inspection image 29 is received from the head device 1 . The sample DB 40 is a database that is referred to when creating the count table 55. The count table 55 is a table in which a plurality of cells are arranged in an array, and includes row elements and column elements.
ＰＣ１ｂは、通信回路３４は、スマートフォンやタブレット端末などの端末装置１ｃと無線通信を実行してもよい。端末装置１ｃは、カウント表５５を表示したり、カウント表５５から作成された検査リストを表示したりしてもよい。検査リストは、シャーレ番号、サンプル名、菌種、培地、希釈倍率、培養時間などを含み、ユーザが検査個体をシャーレ１５に準備する際に参照される。　 The communication circuit 34 of the PC 1b may perform wireless communication with a terminal device 1c such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal. The terminal device 1c may display the count table 55 or a test list created from the count table 55. The test list includes petri dish number, sample name, bacterial species, culture medium, dilution ratio, culture time, etc., and is referred to when the user prepares test specimens in petri dish 15.　
［検査手順］　一般的な検査手順は以下のとおりである。（１）ユーザは、手書きで検査リストを作成する。検査リストは、複数の行を含み、各行は、シャーレ番号、菌種、希釈倍率、カウント数、コメント（サンプル品名など）を書き込み可能となっている。なお、ここでシャーレ番号とは、培地の種類や希釈倍率などの培養条件を特定するために予め所定のルールで割り当てられた識別情報である。（２）ユーザは、検査リストにしたがってシャーレのふたに番号を書き込むか、または、シャーレに予め書き込まれた番号を検査リストに書き込む。（３）ユーザは、検査リストに書き込まれている希釈倍率にしたがって培地を作成する。検査リストに希釈倍率が書き込まれていなければ、ユーザは、実際の希釈倍率を検査リストに書き込む。（４）ユーザは、各シャーレの培地にサンプルを投入（混釈）する。ユーザは、検査リストのコメント欄にサンプル名を書き込む。（５）ユーザは、培養器にシャーレを投入する。（６）所定時間が経過すると、ユーザは、培養器からシャーレを取り出して、コロニーの個数をカウントする。たとえば、ユーザは、シャーレの底面側からコロニーを透かし見ながら、コロニーの位置に油性ペンでカウント済みのマークを付与して行く。コロニーの個数は検査リストに書き込まれる。なお、ユーザは、目視で菌種を確かめながら、菌種ごとのコロニーの個数をカウントしてもよい。この場合、ユーザは、各シャーレについて菌種ごとのコロニーの個数を検査リストに書き込む。（７）ユーザは、ＰＣを起動し、検査リストに書き込まれている数値および文字を読み取りながら、表計算ソフトウエアに、入力する。表計算ソフトウエアのマクロ機能などを使用して、コロニーの個数が集計される。　 [Inspection procedure] The general inspection procedure is as follows. (1) The user creates an inspection list by hand. The test list includes a plurality of lines, and each line allows writing of petri dish number, bacterial species, dilution ratio, count number, and comments (sample product name, etc.). Note that the petri dish number here is identification information that is assigned in advance according to a predetermined rule in order to specify culture conditions such as the type of medium and dilution ratio. (2) The user writes a number on the lid of the petri dish according to the test list, or writes the number previously written on the petri dish in the test list. (3) The user creates a culture medium according to the dilution factor written in the test list. If the dilution factor is not written in the test list, the user writes the actual dilution factor in the test list. (4) The user puts (mixes) the sample into the culture medium of each petri dish. The user writes the sample name in the comment field of the test list. (5) The user puts the petri dish into the incubator. (6) After a predetermined period of time has passed, the user takes out the petri dish from the incubator and counts the number of colonies. For example, while looking through the colonies from the bottom side of the Petri dish, the user marks the positions of the colonies with a permanent marker to indicate that they have been counted. The number of colonies is written into the inspection list. Note that the user may count the number of colonies for each type of bacteria while visually confirming the types of bacteria. In this case, the user writes the number of colonies for each bacterial species in the test list for each petri dish. (7) The user starts up the PC and inputs the numbers and characters written in the inspection list into the spreadsheet software while reading them. The number of colonies is tallied using the macro function of spreadsheet software.　
このように、従来の検査手順では、手書きで検査リストが作成されており、これはユーザにとって非常に面倒な作業であった。また、検査リストに書き込まれた数値等を表計算ソフトウエアのシートに転記する際に誤入力があると、集計結果も誤ってしまう可能性があった。仮に、コロニーの個数をコロニーカウンタによって自動的に取得できたとしても、依然として、従来手法では、検査リストの作成と、コロニー個数の検査リストへの書き込みと、検査リストから表計算ソフトウエアのシートへの転記は、いずれも手書きであり、誤記入および誤入力の可能性があった。　 As described above, in the conventional inspection procedure, an inspection list is created by hand, which is a very troublesome task for the user. Furthermore, if there is an incorrect input when transcribing numerical values written in the inspection list onto a sheet of spreadsheet software, there is a possibility that the tabulation results will also be incorrect. Even if the number of colonies could be automatically obtained using a colony counter, the conventional method still requires creating an inspection list, writing the number of colonies to the inspection list, and converting the inspection list to a spreadsheet software sheet. All transcriptions were handwritten, and there was a possibility of errors or typos.　
そこで、本実施例では、ＰＣ１ｂにより電子的な検査リストを作成し、電子的な検査リストにしたがってコロニーを計数し、当該計数結果を電子的な検査リストに直接入力し、入力された個数を集計することが提案される。これにより、コロニーの計数結果についての事後処理に関するユーザの負担が軽減されるだろう。また、ユーザによる手書き、または、手入力が減少するため、誤入力も減少し、検査精度も向上するであろう。　 Therefore, in this embodiment, an electronic inspection list is created using the PC1b, colonies are counted according to the electronic inspection list, the counting results are directly input into the electronic inspection list, and the input number is totaled. It is suggested that This will reduce the burden on the user regarding post-processing of colony counting results. Furthermore, since handwriting or manual input by the user is reduced, erroneous input will also be reduced and inspection accuracy will be improved.　
［検査リスト（カウント表）の作成］　図５は、ＰＣ１ｂの表示装置３７に表示されるカウントアプリケーションプログラムのＵＩ５０を示している。カウントアプリケーションプログラムは記憶装置３５に記憶されており、ＭＣＵ３０により実行される。ＵＩ５０は、カウントアプリケーションプログラムが有している複数の機能を切り替えるためのボタン、リンクまたはタブなどを有している。　 [Creation of inspection list (count table)] FIG. 5 shows the UI 50 of the count application program displayed on the display device 37 of the PC 1b. The count application program is stored in the storage device 35 and executed by the MCU 30. The UI 50 includes buttons, links, tabs, etc. for switching between multiple functions of the counting application program.　
ＵＩ５０は、表作成領域５１と、ＤＢ表示領域６１とを有している。ＤＢはデータベースの略称である。表作成領域５１は、少なくともカウント表５５を表示する。タイトル表示部５２は、カウント表５５に付与されたタイトル（名称）の入力をキーボード３２から受け付けて表示する。ボタン５３は各セルのカウントの実施／非実施を切り替えるボタンである。ボタン５４は、カウント表５５に列を追加することを指示するボタンである。平均化設定部５６は、カウント結果の平均化を実行するかどうかを指示するためのチェックボックスと、平均化の対象となるカウント値の数（＝カウントの反復回数）の選択部と、を有する。　 The UI 50 has a table creation area 51 and a DB display area 61. DB is an abbreviation for database. The table creation area 51 displays at least a count table 55. The title display section 52 receives the input of the title (name) given to the count table 55 from the keyboard 32 and displays it. The button 53 is a button for switching execution/non-execution of counting each cell. The button 54 is a button for instructing to add a column to the count table 55. The averaging setting unit 56 includes a check box for instructing whether to average the count results, and a selection unit for selecting the number of count values to be averaged (=the number of repetitions of counting). .　
ＤＢ表示領域６１は、予め登録されたカウント項目のひな型の一覧（例：サンプルＤＢ４０）を表示する。ここで、カウント項目とは、カウント表５５における一行に相当する。カウント項目は、通常、検査対象物の名称（サンプル名）により区別される。名称表示部６２は、予め登録されているひな型の名称（サンプル名）を表示する。インジケータ６３は、サンプル名に対して関連付けられている分類タグを視覚的に表示するオブジェクトである。分類タグとは、ユーザによって定義された分類（例：主食、総菜、デザート）を示すタグである。たとえば、インジケータ６３は、色の違いによって分類タグの違いを表現してもよい。インジケータ６３は、インジケータ６３の形状の違いによって分類タグの違いを表現してもよい。ボタン６７は、あるサンプル名に対して親子関係にある１つ以上のサブ項目を展開して表示するためのボタンである。親子関係とは、あるサンプルと、そのサンプルを構成する複数の具材との関係をいう。たとえば、サンドイッチを親とすると、サンドイッチを構成する具材（例：ハム、レタス、玉子）は子となる。ボタン６４は、対応するひな型をカウント表５５に追加することを指示するボタンである。このように予めサンプルＤＢ４０を用意しておくことで、ユーザは、カウント表５５を容易に作成できるようになる。　 The DB display area 61 displays a list of templates of count items registered in advance (eg, sample DB 40). Here, the count item corresponds to one line in the count table 55. Count items are usually distinguished by the name of the object to be inspected (sample name). The name display section 62 displays the name of the model (sample name) registered in advance. The indicator 63 is an object that visually displays the classification tag associated with the sample name. The classification tag is a tag indicating a classification (eg, staple food, prepared dish, dessert) defined by the user. For example, the indicator 63 may represent different classification tags by different colors. The indicators 63 may express different classification tags by different shapes of the indicators 63. The button 67 is a button for expanding and displaying one or more sub-items in a parent-child relationship with respect to a certain sample name. Parent-child relationship refers to the relationship between a certain sample and a plurality of ingredients that make up the sample. For example, if a sandwich is the parent, the ingredients that make up the sandwich (eg, ham, lettuce, egg) are the children. The button 64 is a button for instructing to add the corresponding model to the count table 55. By preparing the sample DB 40 in advance in this way, the user can easily create the count table 55.　
図５に示された事例では、ユーザがサンドイッチに関連付けられたボタン６４を押すと、ＭＣＵ３０は、カウント表５５に一行を追加し、追加された行のＩＤ表示セルにＩＤとして"１"を表示し、追加された行においてサンプル名を表示するセルに「サンドイッチ」を表示する。ＩＤは識別情報の略称である。すなわち、ＩＤやサンプル名は行単位で設定されるものであり、「行に対する設定」である。さらに、ＭＣＵ３０は、サンプルＤＢ４０に登録されているサンドイッチの検査条件を記憶装置３５から読み出し、カウント表５５に新規の列を追加し、新規の列に、読み出した検査条件を表示する。この例では、検査条件は、菌種（例：一般生菌／大腸菌）、培地の希釈倍率、サンプルの培養時間などを含んでいる。各列は、たとえば、菌種のセル、希釈倍率のセル、培養時間のセルおよびカウント値のセルを含む。すなわち、菌種や希釈倍率、培養時間は列単位で設定されるものであり、「列に対する設定」である。この例では、まだ、検査の実行前であり、カウント値が入手されていないため、カウント値のセルには何も入力されていない。サンドイッチについての一つ目の検査項目は、一般生菌について希釈倍率として１００倍の培地を使用し、培養時間として４８時間が適用されることである。サンドイッチについての二つ目の検査項目は、一般生菌について希釈倍率として１０００倍の培地を使用し、培養時間として４８時間が適用されることである。このように、ＭＣＵ３０は、検査項目の個数に応じて列を追加する。　 In the example shown in FIG. 5, when the user presses the button 64 associated with sandwich, the MCU 30 adds one row to the count table 55 and displays "1" as the ID in the ID display cell of the added row. Then, in the added row, "Sandwich" is displayed in the cell that displays the sample name. ID is an abbreviation for identification information. That is, the ID and sample name are set for each row, and are "settings for rows." Furthermore, the MCU 30 reads out the sandwich inspection conditions registered in the sample DB 40 from the storage device 35, adds a new column to the count table 55, and displays the read inspection conditions in the new column. In this example, the test conditions include the type of bacteria (eg, common viable bacteria/E. coli), the dilution ratio of the medium, the culture time of the sample, and the like. Each column includes, for example, a cell for bacterial species, a cell for dilution ratio, a cell for culture time, and a cell for count value. That is, the bacterial species, dilution ratio, and culture time are set for each row, and are "settings for each row." In this example, the test has not yet been executed and the count value has not yet been obtained, so nothing is entered in the count value cell. The first inspection item for sandwiches is that a medium with a dilution rate of 100 times is used for general viable bacteria, and a culture time of 48 hours is applied. The second inspection item for sandwiches is that a medium with a dilution rate of 1000 times is used for general viable bacteria, and a culture time of 48 hours is applied. In this way, the MCU 30 adds columns according to the number of inspection items.　
図６は、ユーザがキムチに関連付けられたボタン６４を押すと、ＭＣＵ３０は、サンプルＤＢ４０に登録されているキムチの検査条件を記憶装置３５から読み出し、読み出された検査条件に対応する行と列をカウント表５５に追加する。　 FIG. 6 shows that when the user presses a button 64 associated with kimchi, the MCU 30 reads out the test conditions for kimchi registered in the sample DB 40 from the storage device 35, and rows and columns corresponding to the read test conditions. is added to the count table 55.　
この例で、キムチは、二つの検査項目を有している。キムチについての一つ目の検査項目は、一般生菌について希釈倍率として１００倍の培地を使用し、培養時間として４８時間が適用されることである。これは、サンドイッチについての一つ目の検査項目と共通している。そのため、ＭＣＵ３０は、キムチのひな型に含まれている一つ目の検査項目を破棄し、新規の列として追加しない。キムチについての二つ目の検査項目は、大腸菌について希釈倍率として１００倍の培地を使用し、培養時間として２４時間が適用されることである。ＭＣＵ３０は、これを新規の列としてカウント表５５に追加する。　 In this example, kimchi has two inspection items. The first inspection item for kimchi is that a medium with a dilution rate of 100 times is used for general viable bacteria, and a culture time of 48 hours is applied. This is common to the first inspection item for sandwiches. Therefore, the MCU 30 discards the first inspection item included in the kimchi model and does not add it as a new column. The second inspection item for kimchi is that a medium with a dilution rate of 100 times is used for E. coli, and a 24-hour incubation time is applied. The MCU 30 adds this to the count table 55 as a new column.　
なお、サンドイッチについては大腸菌に関する検査は実行されない。そのためカウント値のセルには「非検査」を示す文字または画像が表示されてもよい。同様に、キムチについては一般生菌について希釈倍率として１０００倍の培地を使用する検査は実行されない。そのため、カウント値のセルには「非検査」を示す文字または画像が表示されてもよい。　 Please note that sandwiches will not be tested for E. coli. Therefore, characters or images indicating "non-inspection" may be displayed in the count value cell. Similarly, for kimchi, tests using a medium with a dilution ratio of 1000 times for general viable bacteria are not performed. Therefore, characters or images indicating "non-inspection" may be displayed in the count value cell.　
なお、カウントの実施・非実施はカウント反転ボタン５３の操作により実行することもできる。サンドイッチについて、大腸菌に対応するセルを選択した状態で、カウント反転ボタン５３が操作されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、「非検査」を示す文字または画像を表示するか、カウント結果を入力するために空欄とするのかを切り替えることができてもよい。　 Note that counting can also be carried out or not carried out by operating the count inversion button 53. Regarding the sandwich, when the count reversal button 53 is operated with a cell corresponding to E. coli selected, the MCU 30 displays text or an image indicating "not tested", or displays a blank field for inputting the count result. It may also be possible to switch between　
図５および図６が示すように検索ボックス６５やタグ検索絞り込みボタン６６が追加されてもよい。サンプルＤＢ４０に登録されているひな型の個数が多くなると、ＤＢ表示領域６１は、一度にすべてのひな型を表示することができなくなる。そこで、ＭＣＵ３０は、検索ボックス６５に入力された文字に基づき記憶装置３５から検索してひな型を抽出し、ＤＢ表示領域６１に検索結果を表示してもよい。また、タグ検索絞り込みボタン６６が押されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、指定した分類タグでフィルタされたサンプル品だけを表示してもよい。たとえば、複数のサンプル品に対して同じ分類タグが付与されていてもよい。この場合、選択された分類タグが付与されている複数のサンプル品をカウント表５５へ追加する。　 As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, a search box 65 and a tag search refinement button 66 may be added. When the number of templates registered in the sample DB 40 increases, the DB display area 61 cannot display all the templates at once. Therefore, the MCU 30 may search the storage device 35 based on the characters input in the search box 65 to extract a template, and display the search results in the DB display area 61. Furthermore, when the tag search refinement button 66 is pressed, the MCU 30 may display only sample products filtered by the specified classification tag. For example, the same classification tag may be assigned to multiple sample products. In this case, a plurality of sample products to which the selected classification tag is attached are added to the count table 55.　
図７は、新規の行を追加する別の手順を示している。ユーザは、新規の行におけるサンプル名表示セルをポインタ５７で選択し、キーボード３２を通じてサンプル名を先頭の文字から順番に入力して行く。ＭＣＵ３０は、入力された一以上の文字でサンプルＤＢ４０を検索し、入力候補となるサンプル名を候補表示部５８に表示する。この例では、サンプル名表示セルに「ミックス」が入力されたため、ＭＣＵ３０は「ミックス」をサンプル名として含むひな型を検索し、「ミックスジュース」を発見し、候補表示部５８に「ミックスジュース」を表示する。ここで、ユーザが、ポインタ５７によって候補表示部５８に表示された「ミックスジュース」を選択すると、ＭＣＵ３０は、ミックスジュースの検査条件を記憶装置３５から読み出し、読み出された検査条件に応じて列を追加する。これにより、ミックスジュースのセルに検索条件が関連付けられることになる。　 FIG. 7 shows another procedure for adding new rows. The user selects the sample name display cell in the new row with the pointer 57 and inputs the sample name using the keyboard 32 in order from the first character. The MCU 30 searches the sample DB 40 using the input one or more characters, and displays sample names as input candidates on the candidate display section 58. In this example, since "mix" is input in the sample name display cell, the MCU 30 searches for a template that includes "mix" as a sample name, finds "mixed juice", and displays "mixed juice" in the candidate display section 58. indicate. Here, when the user selects "mixed juice" displayed on the candidate display section 58 with the pointer 57, the MCU 30 reads out the test conditions for the mixed juice from the storage device 35, and selects a column according to the read test conditions. Add. As a result, the search condition will be associated with the mixed juice cell.　
図８は、新規にカウント表を作成する場合のＵＩ５０を示している。たとえば、ＭＣＵ３０は、アプリケーションプログラム３９と並行して表計算ソフトウエアを起動することができる。　 FIG. 8 shows the UI 50 when creating a new count table. For example, the MCU 30 can launch spreadsheet software in parallel with the application program 39.　
図９は、表計算ソフトウエアのシート７０を示している。ＭＣＵ３０は、表計算ソフトウエアにおいて選択されたシート７０ま
たはセル群について、ＵＩ５０へのコピーペーストの指示を受け付ける。これにより、ＭＣＵ３０は、図６に示されたカウント表５５を作成してもよい。　 FIG. 9 shows a sheet 70 of spreadsheet software. The MCU 30 receives a copy-paste instruction to the UI 50 for the sheet 70 or cell group selected in the spreadsheet software. Thereby, the MCU 30 may create the count table 55 shown in FIG. 6.
図１０は、すでにカウント値が入力されたカウント表８２を呼び出して新規のカウント表５５を作成する手順を説明する図である。ＭＣＵ３０は、検索ボックス６５に入力されたファイル名に対応するファイルを記憶装置３５から読み出し、そのファイルの属性を属性表示部８０に表示してもよい。ＭＣＵ３０は、表作成領域５１に、読み出されたカウント表８２を表示する。図１０が示すように、カウント値のセルにはカウント値が入力済みである。ＭＣＵ３０は、新規作成ボタン８１が押されたことを検知すると、読み出されたカウント表８２を構成しているカウント値のセルに入力されているカウント値をすべて削除し、新規のカウント表５５を作成する。図１１は、すでにカウント値が入力されたカウント表８２から作成された新規のカウント表５５を示している。カウント値を削除する代わりに、カウント値が０にリセットされてもよい。　 FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for creating a new count table 55 by calling the count table 82 in which count values have already been input. The MCU 30 may read the file corresponding to the file name input into the search box 65 from the storage device 35 and display the attribute of the file on the attribute display section 80. The MCU 30 displays the read count table 82 in the table creation area 51. As shown in FIG. 10, a count value has already been input into the count value cell. When the MCU 30 detects that the new creation button 81 has been pressed, it deletes all the count values input in the count value cells that make up the read count table 82 and creates a new count table 55. create. FIG. 11 shows a new count table 55 created from the count table 82 in which count values have already been input. Instead of deleting the count value, the count value may be reset to zero.　
なお、ＭＣＵ３０は、複数のカウント表８２をマージして一つのカウント表５５を作成してもよい。この場合、ＭＣＵ３０は、複数のカウント表８２を分析し、重複する行と列を削除し、新規のカウント表５５を作成する。　 Note that the MCU 30 may create one count table 55 by merging the plurality of count tables 82. In this case, the MCU 30 analyzes the plurality of count tables 82, deletes duplicate rows and columns, and creates a new count table 55.　
図１２は、平均化を含むカウント表５５の作成方法を説明するための図である。この例では、平均化がまだ適用されていないため、一つのサンプル名について一つの行が設けられている。この状態で平均化設定部５６がチェックされ、反復回数として「２」が選択されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、図１１に示されたＵＩ５０を表示する。図１１が示すように、反復回数が「２」であることから、ＭＣＵ３０は、各サンプル名に関連付けられたカウント値の入力行を三つの行に分割するとともに、反復回数を示す列を追加する。この例では、三つの行のうち、一つ目の行は１回目の検査で取得されたカウント値が入力されるセルを有する。二つ目の行は２回目の検査で取得されたカウント値が入力されるセルを有する。三つ目の行は１回目の検査で取得されたカウント値と、２回目の検査で取得されたカウント値との平均値が入力されるセルを有する。このように、ＭＣＵ３０は、反復回数に応じて、カウント値が入力されるセルと平均値が入力されるセルとをカウント表５５に追加してもよい。　 FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a method of creating the count table 55 including averaging. In this example, there is one row for each sample name because averaging has not yet been applied. In this state, the averaging setting section 56 is checked, and when "2" is selected as the number of repetitions, the MCU 30 displays the UI 50 shown in FIG. 11. As shown in FIG. 11, since the number of repetitions is "2", the MCU 30 divides the input row of count values associated with each sample name into three rows, and adds a column indicating the number of repetitions. . In this example, of the three rows, the first row has a cell into which the count value obtained in the first test is input. The second row has cells into which the count values obtained in the second test are entered. The third row has a cell into which the average value of the count value obtained in the first test and the count value obtained in the second test is input. In this manner, the MCU 30 may add cells into which the count value is input and cells into which the average value is input to the count table 55 depending on the number of repetitions.　
図１３は、複数のサンプル間の親子関係の一例を示す。この例では、サンドイッチのインジケータ６３が押されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、サンドイッチと親子関係を有する具材である「ハム」と「レタス」を選択可能にＤＢ表示領域６１に表示する。この状態で、「ハム」または「レタス」のボタン６４が押されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、「ハム」または「レタス」の検査項目を記憶装置３５から読み出し、カウント表５５に追加する。図１４は、「ハム」および「レタス」の各検査項目が記憶装置３５から読み出されて、カウント表５５に追加されたことを示す。親子関係を有するサンドイッチ、ハムおよびレタスが一括して登録されてもよい。たとえば、サンドイッチに関連付けられたボタン６４が押されると、サンドイッチ、ハムおよびレタスがテーブル表５５に一括して登録されてもよい。　 FIG. 13 shows an example of a parent-child relationship between multiple samples. In this example, when the sandwich indicator 63 is pressed, the MCU 30 selectably displays "ham" and "lettuce", which are ingredients that have a parent-child relationship with the sandwich, in the DB display area 61. In this state, when the "ham" or "lettuce" button 64 is pressed, the MCU 30 reads the test item "ham" or "lettuce" from the storage device 35 and adds it to the count table 55. FIG. 14 shows that the test items "ham" and "lettuce" have been read from the storage device 35 and added to the count table 55. Sandwich, ham, and lettuce having a parent-child relationship may be registered all at once. For example, when the button 64 associated with sandwiches is pressed, sandwiches, ham, and lettuce may be registered in the table 55 all at once.　
図１５は、列を追加するためのダイアログ９０を示している。ＵＩ５０に設けられたボタン５４が押されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、ダイアログ９０を表示装置３７に表示する。項目名設定部９１は、列の項目名である菌種の名称の入力を受け付ける。列タイプ設定部９２は、列のタイプがカウント列であるか、または、自由列であるかの設定を受け付ける。カウント列とは、カウント値が入力されるセルを含む列である。自由列とは、備考やコメントなど、ユーザが自由にテキスト、画像、その他の情報を入力可能な列である。希釈倍率設定部９３は、希釈倍率の入力を受け付ける。培養時間設定部９４は、培養時間の入力を受け付ける。アルゴリズム設定部９５は、検査画像に適用される画像処理の設定を受け付ける。残渣除去とは、シャーレ１５などに付着した残渣（例：ゴミ、汚れ、手書き）を画像処理によって低減するモードである。迅速モードとは、迅速な結果の確認を重視したモードであり、[0]従来よりも短い培養時間で培養されたシャーレ１５を高感度で検査するモードである。培地タイプ設定部９６は、培地の種類（例：一般生菌（白）、一般生菌（黒））などの選択を受け付ける。なお、一覧ボタン９６ａが押されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、記憶装置３５から培地タイプの候補を読み出してリストを作成して表示装置３７に表示してもよい。カウント設定部９７は、メインカメラ１１の撮影条件（例：露光時間）、照明の種類（例：明るさ、照明装置）、表示処理の種類、画像処理の種類などの設定を受け付ける。すなわち、ダイアログ９０で受け付けられた菌種、希釈倍率、培養時間、アルゴリズム設定、培地タイプ、またはカウント設定は、デフォルトの設定として列ごとに設定される。　 FIG. 15 shows a dialog 90 for adding columns. When the button 54 provided on the UI 50 is pressed, the MCU 30 displays a dialog 90 on the display device 37. The item name setting section 91 accepts input of the name of the bacterial species, which is the item name of the column. The column type setting section 92 accepts settings as to whether the column type is a count column or a free column. A count column is a column containing cells into which count values are input. A free column is a column in which the user can freely input text, images, and other information such as notes and comments. The dilution rate setting unit 93 receives input of a dilution rate. The culture time setting unit 94 receives input of culture time. The algorithm setting unit 95 receives settings for image processing applied to the inspection image. Residue removal is a mode in which residues (eg, dust, dirt, handwriting) attached to the Petri dish 15 or the like are reduced by image processing. The rapid mode is a mode that emphasizes quick confirmation of results, and is a mode in which [0] a Petri dish 15 cultured in a shorter culture time than conventional methods is inspected with high sensitivity. The culture medium type setting section 96 accepts selection of the type of culture medium (eg, general viable bacteria (white), general viable bacteria (black)), and the like. Note that when the list button 96a is pressed, the MCU 30 may read the medium type candidates from the storage device 35, create a list, and display the list on the display device 37. The count setting section 97 accepts settings such as photographing conditions (eg, exposure time) of the main camera 11, type of illumination (eg, brightness, lighting device), type of display processing, type of image processing, etc. That is, the bacterial species, dilution factor, culture time, algorithm settings, medium type, or count settings accepted in the dialog 90 are set for each column as default settings.　
［カウント処理］　図１６は、ＰＣ１ｂからヘッド装置１ａを制御してカウント処理を実行中にＰＣ１ｂの表示装置３７に表示されるＵＩ１００を示している。カウント表領域１０１は、ＵＩ５０を通じて編集されたカウント表５５を表示する領域である。結果領域１０２は、ヘッド装置１ａのメインカメラ１１により取得された検査画像１０３を表示する領域である。なお、検査画像１０３は、動画像であってもよいし、静止画像であってもよい。一般に、メインカメラ１１の露光時間の調整、リング照明装置１２、１３および同軸照明装置１４の明るさ、点灯すべき発光素子の選択、画像処理の選択などを実行する際は、ＭＣＵ３０は、メインカメラ１１により動画像を取得して、結果領域１０２に表示する。一方で、カウント処理を実行する際には、ＭＣＵ３０は、メインカメラ１１により静止画像を取得して、結果領域１０２に表示する。　 [Counting Process] FIG. 16 shows the UI 100 displayed on the display device 37 of the PC 1b while the PC 1b controls the head device 1a to execute the counting process. The count table area 101 is an area for displaying the count table 55 edited through the UI 50. The result area 102 is an area for displaying the inspection image 103 acquired by the main camera 11 of the head device 1a. Note that the inspection image 103 may be a moving image or a still image. Generally, when adjusting the exposure time of the main camera 11, brightness of the ring lighting devices 12, 13 and coaxial lighting device 14, selecting light emitting elements to be lit, selecting image processing, etc., the MCU 30 controls the main camera 11. 11, a moving image is acquired and displayed in the result area 102. On the other hand, when executing the counting process, the MCU 30 acquires a still image using the main camera 11 and displays it in the result area 102.　
チェックボックス１０６は、カウント値領域１０４にカウント結果を表示するかどうかを選択するためのコントロールオブジェクトである。第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａは、第一ハードウエアボタン８ａと同一の機能を有するボタンである。第二ソフトウエアボタン１０５ｂは、第二ハードウエアボタン８ｂと同一の機能を有するボタンである。この例では、第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａには撮影の指示（撮影ボタン）が割り当てられている。第二ソフトウエアボタン１０５ｂには登録の指示（登録ボタン）が割り当てられている。図１５においては、第二ソフトウエアボタン１０５ｂが破線で示されているが、これは操作不可能であることを意味する。　 The check box 106 is a control object for selecting whether or not to display the count result in the count value area 104. The first software button 105a is a button that has the same function as the first hardware button 8a. The second software button 105b is a button that has the same function as the second hardware button 8b. In this example, a shooting instruction (shooting button) is assigned to the first software button 105a. A registration instruction (registration button) is assigned to the second software button 105b. In FIG. 15, the second software button 105b is shown with a broken line, which means that it is inoperable.　
ユーザは、カウント表領域１０１に表示されたカウント表に含まれる複数のセルのうち、ステージ５にセットしたシャーレ１５に対応するセルをポインタ５７によりクリックして選択する。図１６に示すように、どのセルがユーザにより選択されたかが分かるように、ポインタ５７により選択されたセルは、強調して表示されてもよい。各セルには、予め検査条件（コロニーを二値化する際の感度、照明装置の種類、明るさなど）が関連付けられて記憶装置３５に保存されている。ＭＣＵ３０は、選択されたセルに関連付けられている検査条件を記憶装置３５から読み出して、ヘッド装置１ａに送信する。ヘッド装置１ａのＭＣＵ２０は受信された検査条件にしたがってメインカメラ１１、リング照明装置１２、１３、および同軸照明装置１４を制御し、画像を取得して、ＰＣ１ｂへ送信する。なお、別のセルが選択されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、選択されたセルに関連付けられている検査条件を記憶装置３５から読み出して、ヘッド装置１ａに送信する。ヘッド装置１ａのＭＣＵ２０は受信された検査条件にしたがってメインカメラ１１、リング照明装置１２、１３および同軸照明装置１４を制御し、画像を取得して、ＰＣ１ｂへ送信する。このように、ユーザは、セルを選択することで、検査条件を変更することができる。　 The user clicks with the pointer 57 to select a cell corresponding to the Petri dish 15 set on the stage 5 from among the plurality of cells included in the count table displayed in the count table area 101. As shown in FIG. 16, the cell selected by the pointer 57 may be highlighted and displayed so that the user can see which cell has been selected. Inspection conditions (sensitivity when binarizing colonies, type of lighting device, brightness, etc.) are associated with each cell in advance and stored in the storage device 35. The MCU 30 reads the inspection conditions associated with the selected cell from the storage device 35 and transmits them to the head device 1a. The MCU 20 of the head device 1a controls the main camera 11, ring illumination devices 12, 13, and coaxial illumination device 14 according to the received inspection conditions, acquires images, and transmits them to the PC 1b. Note that when another cell is selected, the MCU 30 reads the inspection conditions associated with the selected cell from the storage device 35 and transmits them to the head device 1a. The MCU 20 of the head device 1a controls the main camera 11, ring illumination devices 12, 13, and coaxial illumination device 14 according to the received inspection conditions, acquires images, and transmits them to the PC 1b. In this way, the user can change the inspection conditions by selecting a cell.　
図１７は、設定タブまたは設定ボタンをポインタ５７にクリックすることで表示される検査条件の確認画面１１０を示す。これにより、ユーザは、各セルごとの検査条件を確認することができる。なお、セルをポインタ５７により右クリックすることで、確認画面１１０が表示されてもよい。確認画面１１０に表示される情報としては、たとえば、サンプル名、培地の種類、希釈倍率、培養時間、シャーレ番号、コメント、撮影設定（落射照明のオンオフ、照明装置の種類、落射照明の明るさ、透過照明の明るさ、画像処理（ハイダイナミックレンジ"ＨＤＲ"のオンオフ、リング除去のオンオフなどのカウント設定）などである。図１７において、「上リング」とはリング照明装置１２の略称である。「下リング」とはリング照明装置１３の略称である。「全射」とは同軸照明装置１４の略称である。ここで、ＭＣＵ３０は、菌種、希釈倍率、培養時間、アルゴリズム設定、培地タイプ、または撮影設定（カウント設定）について、図１５に示すダイアログ９０上で、列単位で、デフォルト値を設定するが、図１７の確認画面１１０上で、各セルに対して個別に設定してもよい。　 FIG. 17 shows an inspection condition confirmation screen 110 that is displayed when the pointer 57 clicks on the settings tab or button. This allows the user to check the inspection conditions for each cell. Note that the confirmation screen 110 may be displayed by right-clicking a cell with the pointer 57. The information displayed on the confirmation screen 110 includes, for example, sample name, type of medium, dilution factor, culture time, petri dish number, comment, imaging settings (on/off of epi-illumination, type of illumination device, brightness of epi-illumination, These include the brightness of transmitted illumination, image processing (count settings such as on/off of high dynamic range "HDR", on/off of ring removal, etc.) In FIG. 17, "upper ring" is an abbreviation for the ring illumination device 12. "Lower ring" is an abbreviation for the ring illumination device 13. "Surface" is an abbreviation for the coaxial illumination device 14. Here, the MCU 30 represents the bacterial species, dilution ratio, culture time, algorithm settings, and medium type. , or shooting settings (count settings), default values are set for each column on the dialog 90 shown in FIG. 15, but they can also be set individually for each cell on the confirmation screen 110 shown in FIG. good.
なお、セルに対してダブルクリックなどの特定の入力を受け付けることで、当該セルに対応する設定を一覧表示した確認画面１１０がＵＩ１００上に重畳して表示されてもよい。また、ポインタ５７によりセルが選択されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、当該セルに対応する設定をＵＩ１００上に表示するようにしてもよい。　 Note that by accepting a specific input such as double-clicking on a cell, the confirmation screen 110 displaying a list of settings corresponding to the cell may be displayed superimposed on the UI 100. Further, when a cell is selected by the pointer 57, the MCU 30 may display settings corresponding to the cell on the UI 100.　
図１８は、撮影ボタンである第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａまたは第一ハードウエアボタン８ａが押されると、ＭＣＵ３０が表示装置３７に表示するＵＩ１００を示している。結果領域１０２には、シャーレ１５の画像１０３（静止画像）が表示される。ＭＣＵ３０は、第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａを撮影ボタンからカウントを指示するボタン（カウントボタン）に割り当てる。　 FIG. 18 shows a UI 100 that the MCU 30 displays on the display device 37 when the first software button 105a or the first hardware button 8a, which is a shooting button, is pressed. In the result area 102, an image 103 (still image) of the petri dish 15 is displayed. The MCU 30 assigns the first software button 105a to a button (count button) that instructs counting from the shooting button.　
図１９は、カウントボタンである第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａまたは第一ハードウエアボタン８ａが押されると、ＭＣＵ３０が表示装置３７に表示するＵＩ１００を示している。カウントボタンが押されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、ヘッド装置１ａにコロニーのカウントを指示する。ヘッド装置１ａのＭＣＵ２０はカウント指示にしたがってコロニーをカウントし、カウント値をＰＣ１ｂへ送信する。なお、カウント処理はＭＣＵ３０により実行されてもよい。ＭＣＵ３０は、カウント値をカウント値領域１０４に表示する。この際には、ＭＣＵ３０は、カウント値をＣＦＵ／ｍＬ（単位体積（ミリリットル）あたりのコロニーの個数）に変換してカウント値領域１０４に表示してもよい。たとえば、カウント値領域１０４をポインタ５７でクリックするごとに、ＭＣＵ３０は、カウント値のみ、ＣＦＵ／ｍＬのみ、カウント値＋ＣＦＵ／ｍＬと順番に表示を切り替えてもよい。なお、ＣＦＵはコロニー形成単位の略称である。また、カウント値が取得されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａをカウントボタンから撮影ボタンに割り当て直す。さらに、ＭＣＵ３０は、登録ボタンに割り当てられている第二ソフトウエアボタン１０５ｂおよび第二ハードウエアボタン８ｂを操作不可能状態から操作可能状態に変更する。　 FIG. 19 shows the UI 100 that the MCU 30 displays on the display device 37 when the first software button 105a or the first hardware button 8a, which is a count button, is pressed. When the count button is pressed, the MCU 30 instructs the head device 1a to count colonies. The MCU 20 of the head device 1a counts colonies according to the count instruction and transmits the count value to the PC 1b. Note that the counting process may be executed by the MCU 30. The MCU 30 displays the count value in the count value area 104. In this case, the MCU 30 may convert the count value into CFU/mL (number of colonies per unit volume (milliliter)) and display it in the count value area 104. For example, each time the count value area 104 is clicked with the pointer 57, the MCU 30 may switch the display in order of only the count value, only CFU/mL, and count value + CFU/mL. Note that CFU is an abbreviation for colony forming unit. Further, when the count value is acquired, the MCU 30 reassigns the first software button 105a from the count button to the shooting button. Further, the MCU 30 changes the second software button 105b and second hardware button 8b assigned to the registration button from an inoperable state to an operable state.　
図２０は、登録ボタンが押された状態を示している。ＭＣＵ３０は、現在選択中のセルに対してカウント値を書き込み、次のセルを選択中（注目セル）に変更してもよい。この例では、１行目のセルから２行目のセルに注目セル（アクティブセル）が変更されている。このように、ＭＣＵ３０が自動的に次のセルを選択することで、ユーザの負担が軽減される。なお、ＭＣＵ３０は、登録ボタンに割り当てられている第二ソフトウエアボタン１０５ｂおよび第二ハードウエアボタン８ｂを操作可能状態から操作不可能状態に戻す。　 FIG. 20 shows a state in which the registration button is pressed. The MCU 30 may write a count value to the currently selected cell and change the next cell to be selected (the cell of interest). In this example, the cell of interest (active cell) is changed from the cell in the first row to the cell in the second row. In this way, the MCU 30 automatically selects the next cell, thereby reducing the burden on the user. Note that the MCU 30 returns the second software button 105b and second hardware button 8b assigned to the registration button from an operable state to an inoperable state.　
図２０に示されているＵＩ１００は、セルの表示対象の変更メニュー１０９を有している。図２０では、変更メニュー１０９において「カウント数」が選択されているため、セルには、「１００」が表示されている。　 The UI 100 shown in FIG. 20 has a cell display target change menu 109. In FIG. 20, since "Count" is selected in the change menu 109, "100" is displayed in the cell.　
図２１が示
すように、ユーザが変更メニュー１０９において「ＣＦＵ／ｍＬ」を選択すると、ＭＣＵ３０は、セルの表示対象を「カウント数」から「ＣＦＵ／ｍＬ」に変更する。これにより、ユーザは容易にセルの表示対象を切り替えることができる。　 As shown in FIG. 21, when the user selects "CFU/mL" in the change menu 109, the MCU 30 changes the cell display target from "count number" to "CFU/mL". This allows the user to easily switch the cell display target.
図２２が示すように、ユーザが変更メニュー１０９において「コメント」を選択すると、ＭＣＵ３０は、セルの表示対象を「コメント」に変更する。これにより、ユーザは容易にセルの表示対象をコメントに切り替えることができる。また、このＵＩ１００においても、ユーザは、図２２に示すように「コンタミ発生」などのコメントを直接入力できる。ここで、コメントとは、カウント表の一行に含まれる備考などである。　 As shown in FIG. 22, when the user selects "comment" in the change menu 109, the MCU 30 changes the cell display target to "comment". This allows the user to easily switch the cell display target to comments. Also, in this UI 100, the user can directly input a comment such as "contamination has occurred" as shown in FIG. 22. Here, the comment is a note included in one line of the count table.　
図２３は、カウント値が入力済みであるセルをダブルクリックされると、ＭＣＵ３０が表示装置３７に表示するＵＩ１００を示している。設定画面１２０は、ダブルクリックにより選択されたセルに関連付けられている検査条件のうちコロニーの検出アルゴリズムに関するパラメータを調整するためのコントロールオブジェクトを含む。スライドバー１２１は、たとえば、小粒子を画像処理により除去するための閾値を設定するためのコントロールオブジェクトである。スライドバー１２２は、コロニーの検出感度を調整するためのコントロールオブジェクトである。　 FIG. 23 shows the UI 100 that the MCU 30 displays on the display device 37 when a cell in which a count value has been input is double-clicked. The settings screen 120 includes a control object for adjusting parameters related to the colony detection algorithm among the test conditions associated with the cell selected by double-clicking. The slide bar 121 is, for example, a control object for setting a threshold value for removing small particles through image processing. The slide bar 122 is a control object for adjusting colony detection sensitivity.　
ＭＣＵ３０は、結果領域１０２に表示された画像１０３において、コロニーとして検出された部分にサークルなどのマークを重畳表示してもよい。スライドバー１２１、１２２の調整に応じて、ＭＣＵ３０がアルゴリズムを変更するため、コロニーを示すマークの位置と個数も変化する。これにより、ユーザは、適切な調整量を見出しやすくなるであろう。　 In the image 103 displayed in the result area 102, the MCU 30 may display a mark such as a circle in a superimposed manner on a portion detected as a colony. Since the MCU 30 changes the algorithm according to the adjustment of the slide bars 121 and 122, the position and number of marks indicating colonies also change. This will make it easier for the user to find an appropriate amount of adjustment.　
［ボタンの割り当て］　図２４は、第一ハードウエアボタン８ａ（第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａ）と、第二ハードウエアボタン８ｂ（第二ソフトウエアボタン１０５ｂ）に割り当てられる機能の一例を示している。　 [Button Assignment] FIG. 24 shows an example of functions assigned to the first hardware button 8a (first software button 105a) and the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b).　
カウント表の状態が「カウント表が表示されている」状態であり、画像１０３が動画像であり、かつ、アクティブセルの状態がカウント値未入力であれば、第一ハードウエアボタン８ａ（第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａ）にはカウントボタンが割り当てられ、第二ハードウエアボタン８ｂ（第二ソフトウエアボタン１０５ｂ）には登録ボタン（操作不可能）が割り当てられる。　 If the state of the count table is "count table is displayed", the image 103 is a moving image, and the state of the active cell is that no count value has been input, press the first hardware button 8a (the first A count button is assigned to the software button 105a), and a registration button (inoperable) is assigned to the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b).　
カウント表の状態が「カウント表が表示されている」状態であり、画像１０３が動画像であり、かつ、アクティブセルの状態がカウント値入力済みであれば、第一ハードウエアボタン８ａ（第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａ）にはカウントボタンが割り当てられ、第二ハードウエアボタン８ｂ（第二ソフトウエアボタン１０５ｂ）には登録ボタン（操作不可能）が割り当てられる。　 If the state of the count table is "count table is displayed", the image 103 is a moving image, and the state of the active cell is that the count value has already been input, press the first hardware button 8a (the first A count button is assigned to the software button 105a), and a registration button (inoperable) is assigned to the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b).　
カウント表の状態が「カウント表が表示されている」状態であり、画像１０３が静止画像であり、かつ、アクティブセルの状態がカウント値未入力であれば、第一ハードウエアボタン８ａ（第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａ）には撮影ボタンが割り当てられ、第二ハードウエアボタン８ｂ（第二ソフトウエアボタン１０５ｂ）には登録ボタン（操作可能）が割り当てられる。なお、撮影ボタンは、撮りなおしボタンと呼ばれてもよい。　 If the state of the count table is "count table is displayed", the image 103 is a still image, and the state of the active cell is that no count value has been input, press the first hardware button 8a (the first A shooting button is assigned to the software button 105a), and a registration button (operable) is assigned to the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b). Note that the shooting button may also be called a reshooting button.　
カウント表の状態が「カウント表が表示されている」状態であり、画像１０３が静止画像であり、かつ、アクティブセルの状態がカウント値入力済みであれば、第一ハードウエアボタン８ａ（第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａ）には撮影ボタンが割り当てられ、第二ハードウエアボタン８ｂ（第二ソフトウエアボタン１０５ｂ）には登録ボタン（操作不可能）が割り当てられる。　 If the state of the count table is "count table is displayed", the image 103 is a still image, and the state of the active cell is that the count value has been input, press the first hardware button 8a (the first A shooting button is assigned to the software button 105a), and a registration button (inoperable) is assigned to the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b).　
カウント表の状態が「カウント表が表示されていない」状態であり、画像１０３が動画像であり、かつ、アクティブセルの状態がカウント値未入力であれば、第一ハードウエアボタン８ａ（第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａ）にはカウントボタンが割り当てられ、第二ハードウエアボタン８ｂ（第二ソフトウエアボタン１０５ｂ）には登録ボタン（操作不可能）が割り当てられる。　 If the state of the count table is "the count table is not displayed", the image 103 is a moving image, and the state of the active cell is that no count value has been entered, press the first hardware button 8a (the first A count button is assigned to the software button 105a), and a registration button (inoperable) is assigned to the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b).　
カウント表の状態が「カウント表が表示されていない」状態であり、画像１０３が動画像であり、かつ、アクティブセルの状態がカウント値入力済みであれば、第一ハードウエアボタン８ａ（第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａ）にはカウントボタンが割り当てられ、第二ハードウエアボタン８ｂ（第二ソフトウエアボタン１０５ｂ）には登録ボタン（操作不可能）が割り当てられる。　 If the state of the count table is "the count table is not displayed", the image 103 is a moving image, and the state of the active cell is that the count value has already been input, press the first hardware button 8a (the first A count button is assigned to the software button 105a), and a registration button (inoperable) is assigned to the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b).　
カウント表の状態が「カウント表が表示されていない」状態であり、画像１０３が静止画像であり、かつ、アクティブセルの状態がカウント値未入力であれば、第一ハードウエアボタン８ａ（第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａ）には撮影ボタンが割り当てられ、第二ハードウエアボタン８ｂ（第二ソフトウエアボタン１０５ｂ）には登録ボタン（操作可能）が割り当てられる。　 If the state of the count table is "the count table is not displayed", the image 103 is a still image, and the state of the active cell is that no count value has been input, press the first hardware button 8a (the first A shooting button is assigned to the software button 105a), and a registration button (operable) is assigned to the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b).　
カウント表の状態が「カウント表が表示されていない」状態であり、画像１０３が静止画像であり、かつ、アクティブセルの状態がカウント値入力済みであれば、第一ハードウエアボタン８ａ（第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａ）には撮影ボタンが割り当てられ、第二ハードウエアボタン８ｂ（第二ソフトウエアボタン１０５ｂ）には再登録ボタン（操作可能）が割り当てられる。　 If the state of the count table is "the count table is not displayed", the image 103 is a still image, and the state of the active cell is that the count value has already been input, press the first hardware button 8a (the first A shooting button is assigned to the software button 105a), and a re-registration button (operable) is assigned to the second hardware button 8b (second software button 105b).　
図１７や図２３が示すように、カウント表の状態が「カウント表が表示されていない」状態では、カウント表に代えて、検査条件を変更可能なＵＩが表示されている。したがって、検査条件が変更されると、カウント値も変化するため、ユーザには、変化後のカウント値をアクティブセルに書き込む（再登録）するかどうかをＭＣＵ３０が問い合わせることになる。　 As shown in FIGS. 17 and 23, when the state of the count table is "the count table is not displayed", a UI that allows the inspection conditions to be changed is displayed instead of the count table. Therefore, when the test conditions are changed, the count value also changes, and the MCU 30 asks the user whether or not to write (re-register) the changed count value into the active cell.　
「カウント表が表示されていない」状態は、カウント結果が入力されたカウント表が表示され、かつ、カウント結果を再編集可能な状態であってもよい。図２５は、再編集のための編集タブ１２４が設けられたＵＩ１００を示している。図２４に表示された「カウント表が表示されていない」状態は、カウント結果が入力されたカウント表が表示され、かつ、編集タブ１２４がクリックされた状態であってもよい。図２５において検査条件タブ１２３は、図１７に示された検査条件の確認画面１１０を表示するためのタブである。上述されたように、確認画面１１０において照明やメインカメラ１１の設定が変更可能となっている。　 The state where "the count table is not displayed" may be a state where the count table into which the count results have been input is displayed and the count results can be re-edited. FIG. 25 shows the UI 100 provided with an edit tab 124 for re-editing. The "count table not displayed" state displayed in FIG. 24 may be a state in which the count table into which the count results have been input is displayed and the edit tab 124 is clicked. In FIG. 25, the inspection condition tab 123 is a tab for displaying the inspection condition confirmation screen 110 shown in FIG. 17. As described above, settings for lighting and the main camera 11 can be changed on the confirmation screen 110.　
このように結果領域１０２に動画像が表示されているときにカウントボタンが押されると、動画像が静止画像に変更され、カウント結果が表示され、登録ボタンが操作可能となる。静止画像が表示されているときに登録ボタンが押されると、カウント結果がアクティブセルに書き込まれ、結果領域１０２は動画像を表示する状態に戻る。一度登録されたカウント結果が変更され、再登録ボタンが押されると、変更されたカウント結果がカウント表に上書きされ、結果領域１０２は動画像を表示する状態に戻る。結果領域１０２が静止画像を表示しているときに、撮影ボタン（撮りなおしボタン）が押されると、結果領域１０２は動画像を表示する状態に戻る。　 If the count button is pressed while a moving image is being displayed in the result area 102 in this manner, the moving image is changed to a still image, the count result is displayed, and the registration button becomes operable. If the registration button is pressed while a still image is being displayed, the count result is written into the active cell, and the result area 102 returns to the state of displaying a moving image. When the once registered count result is changed and the re-registration button is pressed, the changed count result is overwritten on the count table and the result area 102 returns to the state of displaying a moving image. When the shooting button (re-shooting button) is pressed while the result area 102 is displaying a still image, the result area 102 returns to the state of displaying a moving image.　
［カウント表の特定方法］　ユーザは、シャーレ１５で菌を培養したり、コロニーをカウントしたりする際にカウント表を見ることになる。ここで、カウント表を作成された日と、カウント表を目視して準備作業およびカウント作業を実行する日と、が異なっている場合がある。この場合、ユーザは、所望のカウント表を記憶装置３５から読み出して表示装置３７に表示させる必要がある。　 [Method for specifying the count table] The user will look at the count table when cultivating bacteria in the Petri dish 15 or counting colonies. Here, the date on which the count table is created may be different from the date on which the count table is visually inspected and the preparation work and counting work are performed. In this case, the user needs to read out the desired count table from the storage device 35 and display it on the display device 37.　
図２６は、カウント表などのファイルを呼び出すファイルＵＩ２００を示している。ボタン２１０は、呼び出す対象としてカウント表を指定するためのボタンである。ファイルリスト２１１は、記憶装置３５に記憶されたファイルを一覧２１２として表示する領域である。ボタン２１０が押されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、複数のファイルのうちカウント表に特有の拡張子を有するファイルのみをファイルリスト２１１に表示する。一覧２１２は、ＩＤ（通し番号）、タイトル、最終更新日、カウントが済んでいるかどうか、その他の情報を含む。　 FIG. 26 shows a file UI 200 that calls a file such as a count table. Button 210 is a button for specifying a count table as a target to be called. The file list 211 is an area that displays files stored in the storage device 35 as a list 212. When the button 210 is pressed, the MCU 30 displays, in the file list 211, only files that have extensions specific to the count table among the plurality of files. The list 212 includes ID (serial number), title, last updated date, whether counting has been completed, and other information.　
検索ボックス２１３は、一覧２１２に含まれる複数のファイルからさらに所望のファイルを検索するためのキーワードを入力されるボックスである。ボタン２１４は、カウント表を紙に印刷することで作成された検査リストに付与されている識別画像を読み取るためにフロントカメラ１０を起動することを指示するためのボタンである。開くボタン２１５は、一覧２１２から選択されたカウント表を開くことを指示するボタンである。　 The search box 213 is a box into which a keyword for further searching for a desired file from the plurality of files included in the list 212 is input. The button 214 is a button for instructing to start the front camera 10 in order to read the identification image added to the inspection list created by printing the count sheet on paper. The open button 215 is a button for instructing to open the count table selected from the list 212.　
図２７は、検査リスト２２０を示している。ＭＣＵ３０は検査リスト２２０をプリンタ３８から出力してもよいし、端末装置１ｃの表示装置に出力してもよい。検査リスト２２０は、対応するカウント表５５から作成されたリストである。カウント表５５における情報の並ぶ順序と検査リスト２２０における情報の並ぶ順序とは異なっていてもよいし、一致していてもよい。検査リスト２２０は、表示装置３７に表示されるカウント表５５と同じであってもよい。また、検査リスト２２０にはカウント結果を記入する必要が無いため、カウント結果を記入するためのセルが省略されていてもよい。さらに、ユーザが検査リスト２２０を培養サンプルの準備に用いる場合、培養時間は必ずしも必要ではない。そのため、培養時間のセルが省略されていてもよい。検査リスト２２０は、各カウント表を識別するための識別情報として一次元シンボルや二次元シンボルなどの識別画像２２１を付与されていてもよい。識別画像２２１は、ユーザの識別情報を含んでいてもよい。　 FIG. 27 shows the test list 220. The MCU 30 may output the inspection list 220 from the printer 38 or may output it to the display device of the terminal device 1c. The inspection list 220 is a list created from the corresponding count table 55. The order in which the information is arranged in the count table 55 and the order in which the information is arranged in the test list 220 may be different or may match. The test list 220 may be the same as the count table 55 displayed on the display device 37. Furthermore, since there is no need to write count results in the test list 220, cells for writing count results may be omitted. Furthermore, if the user uses the test list 220 to prepare a culture sample, the culture time is not necessarily required. Therefore, cells for culture time may be omitted. The inspection list 220 may be provided with an identification image 221 such as a one-dimensional symbol or a two-dimensional symbol as identification information for identifying each count table. The identification image 221 may include user identification information.　
図２６に示されたボタン２１４が押されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、ヘッド装置１ａにフロントカメラ１０の起動を指示する。ヘッド装置１ａのＭＣＵ２０は、フロントカメラ１０を起動し、識別画像２２１の読み取りを試行する。識別画像２２１は単にシンボルと呼ばれてもよい。この際にユーザは、フロントカメラ１０に識別画像２２１を読み取らせるよう、検査リスト２２０の位置をフロントカメラ１０に対して合わせる。ＭＣＵ２０は、識別画像２２１の読取に成功すると、識別画像２２１から識別情報を復号（デコード）して、ＰＣ１ｂへ送信する。ＭＣＵ３０は、ヘッド装置１ａから受信された識別情報に関連付けられているカウント表を記憶装置３５から読み出す。　 When the button 214 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the MCU 30 instructs the head device 1a to start the front camera 10. The MCU 20 of the head device 1a starts the front camera 10 and attempts to read the identification image 221. Identification image 221 may simply be called a symbol. At this time, the user positions the inspection list 220 with respect to the front camera 10 so that the front camera 10 reads the identification image 221. When the MCU 20 successfully reads the identification image 221, it decodes the identification information from the identification image 221 and transmits it to the PC 1b. The MCU 30 reads the count table associated with the identification information received from the head device 1a from the storage device 35.　
図２８は、ユーザが身に着けるユーザ認証札２３０を示している。データインテグリティ規制のために、ヘッド装置１ａを使用するユーザに種々の制限が課されることがある。たとえば、米国のＦＤＡ（食品医薬品局）の規則である２１ ＣＦＲ Ｐａｒｔ１１によれば、ユーザは、物理的および論理的に管理されることが求められている。たとえば、ヘッド装置１ａおよびＰＣ１ｂについてもユーザごとに使用可能な機能を制限するために、ユーザ認証札２３０が利用されてもよい。ユーザは、フロントカメラ１０によりユーザ認証札２３０の識別画像２２１を読み取らせることで、ＭＣＵ２０またはＭＣＵ３０がユーザ認証を実行してもよい。つまり、識別画像２２１は、ユーザ名とパスワードなどのアカウント情報を示すシンボルを含んでいてもよい。ただし、ユーザ名とパスワードは暗号化された上で、識別画像２２１となっている。　 FIG. 28 shows a user authentication tag 230 worn by the user. Due to data integrity regulations, various restrictions may be imposed on users who use the head device 1a. For example, according to 21 CFR Part 11, which is a regulation of the US FDA (Food and Drug Administration), users are required to be managed physically and logically. For example, the user authentication tag 230 may be used to limit the functions that can be used for each user in the head device 1a and the PC 1b. The MCU 20 or MCU 30 may perform user authentication by having the user read the identification image 221 of the user authentication tag 230 with the front camera 10. That is, the identification image 221 may include symbols indicating account information such as a user name and password. However, the user name and password are encrypted and become the identification image 221.　
ユーザごとの機能制限としては、次のようなものが考えられる。一例として、ユーザは、管理者、リーダー、および作業者に分かれている。管理者は、ユーザを追加したり、各ユーザの権限を設定したりすることができる。リーダーは、カウント表を作成でき、カウントを実行でき、カウント結果を保存でき、カウント結果を編集でき、カウント結果を出力（印刷、送信）できる。作業者は、カウントを実行でき、カウント結果を保存できる。ＭＣＵ２０およびＭＣＵ３０は、識別画像２２１から特定されたユーザの権限に応じて、そのユーザが実行できる機能を制限してもよい。　 Possible functional limitations for each user include the following: As an example, users are divided into administrators, leaders, and workers. The administrator can add users and set permissions for each user. The reader can create a counting table, perform counting, save the counting results, edit the counting results, and output (print, send) the counting results. Workers can perform counting and save the counting results. The MCU 20 and the MCU 30 may limit the functions that the user can perform, depending on the authority of the user identified from the identification image 221.　
こ
こで、フロントカメラ１０により識別画像２２１が読み取られているが、メインカメラ１１により識別画像２２１が読み取られてもよい。　 Although the identification image 221 is read by the front camera 10 here, the identification image 221 may also be read by the main camera 11.
図４１が示すように、フロントカメラ１０およびメインカメラ１１は、シャーレ１５に貼付されたシール２７０に印刷されているシャーレ番号や識別画像２２１を撮像して読み取ってもよい。識別画像２２１には、カウント表５５の識別情報、サンプル名、カウント結果が格納されるセルを示す固有の識別情報などが符号化されていてもよい。つまり、識別画像２２１を読み取ることで、ＭＣＵ３０は、カウント表５５、サンプル名、シャーレ１５、検査条件を特定することができる。さらに、ＭＣＵ３０は、特定された検査条件をヘッド装置１ａに送信し、ヘッド装置１ａのＭＣＵ２０は受信された検査条件にしたがってメインカメラ１１、リング照明装置１２、１３、および同軸照明装置１４を制御し、画像を取得できる。　 As shown in FIG. 41, the front camera 10 and the main camera 11 may image and read the petri dish number and identification image 221 printed on a sticker 270 attached to the petri dish 15. The identification image 221 may be encoded with identification information of the count table 55, a sample name, unique identification information indicating a cell in which the count result is stored, and the like. That is, by reading the identification image 221, the MCU 30 can specify the count table 55, sample name, petri dish 15, and test conditions. Furthermore, the MCU 30 transmits the specified inspection conditions to the head device 1a, and the MCU 20 of the head device 1a controls the main camera 11, ring illumination devices 12, 13, and coaxial illumination device 14 according to the received inspection conditions. , images can be obtained.　
［フロントカメラの他の応用例］　（１）セルへのテキスト入力　図２９はボタン５４を押すことで備考として利用される新規の列が追加されたカウント表５５を示している。新規の列は、自由列として定義されており、文字や数字だけでなく、画像などを保持することができる。　 [Other Application Examples of Front Camera] (1) Text Input to Cell FIG. 29 shows a count table 55 to which a new column to be used as a note is added by pressing the button 54. The new column is defined as a free column and can hold not only letters and numbers but also images.　
図３０は、自由列のセルをポインタ５７で右クリックされると表示される編集画面２４０を示している。この例では、セルに対するテキスト「商品番号：」が入力済みであり、それに続くテキストを入力するためのダイアログ２４１が表示されている。ダイアログ２４１は、編集画面２４０のテキストボックス内をポインタ５７で右クリックすることで表示される。ダイアログ２４１は、フロントカメラ１０を利用することで商品等からコードを読み取り、読取結果をセルに入力するための複数の選択肢を含む。この例では、選択肢として、フロントカメラ１０によるコードの読み取りが含まれる。たとえば、「コード読み取り（一次元シンボル）」がポインタ５７により選択され、読み取りボタン２４２が押されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、ヘッド装置１ａに対して一次元シンボルの読み取りを指示する。　 FIG. 30 shows an edit screen 240 that is displayed when a cell in a free column is right-clicked with the pointer 57. In this example, the text "product number:" has already been entered in the cell, and a dialog 241 for entering the following text is displayed. The dialog 241 is displayed by right-clicking inside the text box on the editing screen 240 with the pointer 57. The dialog 241 includes a plurality of options for reading a code from a product or the like using the front camera 10 and inputting the reading result into a cell. In this example, the options include reading the code using the front camera 10. For example, when "code reading (one-dimensional symbol)" is selected by the pointer 57 and the read button 242 is pressed, the MCU 30 instructs the head device 1a to read the one-dimensional symbol.　
図３１は、読み取りボタン２４２が押されると、表示装置３７に表示される読取画面２５０を示している。チェックボックス２５１は、ＭＣＵ２０がコードの認識に成功したときにＭＣＵ３０が読取画面２５０を自動的に閉じることを指示するためのチェックボックスである。画像領域２５２は、フロントカメラ１０により取得された動画像または静止画像を表示する。読取結果領域２５３は、一次元シンボルや二次元シンボルから復号されたテキストを表示する領域である。　 FIG. 31 shows a reading screen 250 displayed on the display device 37 when the reading button 242 is pressed. The check box 251 is a check box for instructing the MCU 30 to automatically close the reading screen 250 when the MCU 20 successfully recognizes the code. The image area 252 displays a moving image or a still image captured by the front camera 10. The reading result area 253 is an area that displays text decoded from one-dimensional symbols and two-dimensional symbols.　
ヘッド装置１ａのＭＣＵ２０はフロントカメラ１０を起動し、一次元コードを読み取らせ、一次元コードからテキストを復号し、復号されたテキストをＰＣ１ｂへ送信する。ユーザは読取結果領域２５３に表示されたテキストを確認し、ＯＫボタン２５４またはキャンセルボタン２５５を押す。ＯＫボタン２５４が押されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、読取画面２５０を閉じて編集画面２４０に戻り、ヘッド装置１ａから受信されたテキストをセルに挿入する。キャンセルボタン２５５が押されると、ヘッド装置１ａから受信されたテキストを破棄し、読取画面２５０を閉じて、編集画面２４０に戻る。　 The MCU 20 of the head device 1a activates the front camera 10, causes it to read the one-dimensional code, decodes text from the one-dimensional code, and transmits the decoded text to the PC 1b. The user confirms the text displayed in the reading result area 253 and presses the OK button 254 or cancel button 255. When the OK button 254 is pressed, the MCU 30 closes the reading screen 250, returns to the editing screen 240, and inserts the text received from the head device 1a into the cell. When the cancel button 255 is pressed, the text received from the head device 1a is discarded, the reading screen 250 is closed, and the screen returns to the editing screen 240.　
図３２は、テキストを挿入された編集画面２４０を示す。ここで、ＯＫボタン２５４が押されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、編集画面２４０を閉じ、図２９に示されたＵＩ５０を表示装置３７に表示する。　 FIG. 32 shows the edit screen 240 with text inserted. Here, when the OK button 254 is pressed, the MCU 30 closes the editing screen 240 and displays the UI 50 shown in FIG. 29 on the display device 37.　
（２）セルへの画像入力　図３３は、カウント表の一部、またはカウント表から作成されたカウントレポート２６０の一例を示している。カウント表５５に含まれる自由列のセルには画像データを関連付けることができる。ＭＣＵ３０は、ヘッド装置１ａのメインカメラ１１を制御してシャーレ１５の画像（シャーレ画像）を取得し、取得したシャーレ画像をセルに関連付ける。あるいは、ＭＣＵ３０は、ヘッド装置１ａのフロントカメラ１０を制御してシャーレ１５の画像（シャーレ画像）を取得し、取得したシャーレ画像をセルに関連付けてもよい。同様に、ＭＣＵ３０は、ヘッド装置１ａのフロントカメラ１０を制御して商品の外観画像を取得し、取得した外観画像をセルに関連付けてもよい。さらに、ＭＣＵ３０は、ヘッド装置１ａのフロントカメラ１０を制御して商品に付与されているバーコードを読み取って復号させ、復号された商品番号等をセルに入力してもよい。ＭＣＵ３０は、プリンタ３８を制御し、カウントレポート２６０を紙に印刷してもよい。　 (2) Image input to cells FIG. 33 shows an example of a part of a count table or a count report 260 created from the count table. Image data can be associated with cells in free columns included in the count table 55. The MCU 30 controls the main camera 11 of the head device 1a to obtain an image of the petri dish 15 (petri dish image), and associates the obtained petri dish image with a cell. Alternatively, the MCU 30 may control the front camera 10 of the head device 1a to obtain an image of the petri dish 15 (petri dish image), and may associate the obtained petri dish image with the cell. Similarly, the MCU 30 may control the front camera 10 of the head device 1a to obtain an external appearance image of the product, and may associate the obtained external appearance image with a cell. Furthermore, the MCU 30 may control the front camera 10 of the head device 1a to read and decode the barcode given to the product, and input the decoded product number etc. into the cell. MCU 30 may control printer 38 and print count report 260 on paper.　
ここでは、フロントカメラ１０により様々な画像が取得されているが、メインカメラ１１により様々な画像が取得されて、セルに関連付けられてもよい。　 Here, various images are acquired by the front camera 10, but various images may be acquired by the main camera 11 and associated with the cells.　
［フローチャート］　（１）ＰＣ１ｂの主な処理　図３４は、ＰＣ１ｂのＭＣＵ３０により実行される一連の処理を示すフローチャートである。ＭＣＵ３０は、記憶装置３５に記憶されたカウントアプリケーションプログラムにしたがって以下の処理を実行する。　 [Flowchart] (1) Main processes of PC1b FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a series of processes executed by the MCU 30 of PC1b. The MCU 30 executes the following processing according to the count application program stored in the storage device 35.　
Ｓ１でＭＣＵ３０はカウント表の編集を実行する。図５から図１５などを用いて説明されたように、ＵＩ５０などを通じてカウント表が編集または作成される。　 In S1, the MCU 30 edits the count table. As explained using FIGS. 5 to 15 and the like, the count table is edited or created through the UI 50 and the like.　
Ｓ２でＭＣＵ３０はカウント表を記憶装置３５に保存する。　 In S2, the MCU 30 stores the count table in the storage device 35.　
Ｓ３でＭＣＵ３０はカウント表を特定する。カウント表の特定は、フロントカメラ１０と検査リスト２２０またはユーザ認証札２３０を用いて実行されたり、図２６に示されたファイルＵＩ２００を使用して実行されたりしてもよい。　 In S3, the MCU 30 identifies the count table. Identification of the count table may be performed using the front camera 10 and the inspection list 220 or the user authentication tag 230, or may be performed using the file UI 200 shown in FIG. 26.　
Ｓ４でＭＣＵ３０は特定されたカウント表を記憶装置３５から読み出す。これにより、図１６に示されたＵＩ１００が表示装置３７に表示される。　 In S4, the MCU 30 reads the specified count table from the storage device 35. As a result, the UI 100 shown in FIG. 16 is displayed on the display device 37.　
Ｓ５でＭＣＵ３０はカウント値を書き込まれるセルを特定する。最初は、カウント表において最も上に位置する行のセルが選択されてもよいし、ポインタ５７によりクリックされたセルが選択されてもよい。　 In S5, the MCU 30 specifies the cell to which the count value is written. Initially, a cell in the top row of the count table may be selected, or a cell clicked by the pointer 57 may be selected.　
Ｓ６でＭＣＵ３０はアクティブセルに関連付けられている検査条件を特定する。たとえば、ＭＣＵ３０は、カウント表の作成の際に各セルに対し関連付けられた検査条件を記憶装置３５から読み出す。　 In S6, the MCU 30 specifies test conditions associated with the active cell. For example, the MCU 30 reads the inspection conditions associated with each cell from the storage device 35 when creating the count table.　
Ｓ７でＭＣＵ３０は、アクティブセルに関連付けられている検査条件をヘッド装置１ａに設定する。上述されたように、メインカメラ１１の感度、点灯すべき照明装置、明るさ、点灯すべき発光素子の数（照射方向）、画像処理（ＨＤＲ、リング除去）、カウントアルゴリズム（閾値などのパラメータ）などをヘッド装置１ａに送信する。　 In S7, the MCU 30 sets the inspection conditions associated with the active cell in the head device 1a. As described above, the sensitivity of the main camera 11, the lighting device to be lit, the brightness, the number of light emitting elements to be lit (irradiation direction), image processing (HDR, ring removal), counting algorithm (parameters such as threshold) etc. are sent to the head device 1a.　
Ｓ８でＭＣＵ３０は検査条件が変更されたかどうかを判定する。上述されたように、セルに関連付けられた検査条件は検査中においても随時変更可能である。よって、検査条件が変更されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ７に戻り、変更後の検査条件をヘッド装置１ａに送信する。検査条件が変更されていなければ、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ９に進む。　 In S8, the MCU 30 determines whether the inspection conditions have been changed. As described above, the test conditions associated with a cell can be changed at any time even during testing. Therefore, when the inspection conditions are changed, the MCU 30 returns to S7 and transmits the changed inspection conditions to the head device 1a. If the inspection conditions have not been changed, the MCU 30 proceeds to S9.　
Ｓ９でＭＣＵ３０は、ユーザにより撮影指示が入力されたかどうかを判定する。ユーザは、ヘッド装置１ａの第一ハードウエアボタン８ａまたはＵＩ１００の第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａを押すことで撮影を指示することができる。撮影指示が入力されていなければ、ＭＣＵ３０はＳ９からＳ８に戻る。撮影指示が入力されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ９からＳ１０に進む。　 In S9, the MCU 30 determines whether a shooting instruction has been input by the user. The user can instruct photography by pressing the first hardware button 8a of the head device 1a or the first software button 105a of the UI 100. If no photographing instruction has been input, the MCU 30 returns from S9 to S8. When the shooting instruction is input, the MCU 30 proceeds from S9 to S10.　
Ｓ１０でＭＣＵ３０は、ヘッド装置１ａに対して撮像指示を送信する。　 In S10, the MCU 30 transmits an imaging instruction to the head device 1a.　
Ｓ１１でＭＣＵ３０は、ヘッド装置１ａからメインカメラ１１により取得されたシャーレ画像１０３の画像（検査画像）を取得し、ＵＩ１００の結果領域１０２に検査画像を表示する。　 In S11, the MCU 30 acquires an image (inspection image) of the petri dish image 103 acquired by the main camera 11 from the head device 1a, and displays the inspection image in the result area 102 of the UI 100.　
Ｓ１２でＭＣＵ３０は、カウント指示が入力されたかどうかを判定する。ユーザは、カウントボタンとして割当たられたヘッド装置１ａの第一ハードウエアボタン８ａまたはＵＩ１００の第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａを押すことで、カウント指示を入力できる。カウント指示が入力されていなければ、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ１２からＳ８に戻る。カウント指示が入力されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ１２からＳ１３に進む。　 In S12, the MCU 30 determines whether a count instruction has been input. The user can input a count instruction by pressing the first hardware button 8a of the head device 1a or the first software button 105a of the UI 100, which is assigned as a count button. If no count instruction has been input, the MCU 30 returns to S8 from S12. When the count instruction is input, the MCU 30 proceeds from S12 to S13.　
Ｓ１３でＭＣＵ３０は、カウント指示をヘッド装置１ａへ送信する。なお、カウント処理がＰＣ１ｂにより実行される場合、ＭＣＵ３０がＭＣＵ２０の代わりにカウント処理を実行する。　 In S13, the MCU 30 transmits a count instruction to the head device 1a. Note that when the counting process is executed by the PC 1b, the MCU 30 executes the counting process instead of the MCU 20.　
Ｓ１４でＭＣＵ３０は、ヘッド装置１ａからカウント結果を受信し、カウント結果をカウント値領域１０４に表示する。なお、Ｓ１４でＭＣＵ３０がカウント処理を実行する場合、ＭＣＵ３０はカウント処理を実行することで得られたカウント結果をカウント値領域１０４に表示する。　 In S14, the MCU 30 receives the count result from the head device 1a and displays the count result in the count value area 104. Note that when the MCU 30 executes the counting process in S14, the MCU 30 displays the count result obtained by executing the counting process in the count value area 104.　
Ｓ１５で、ＭＣＵ３０は、画像処理、カウントアルゴリズム等の検査条件が変更されたかどうかを判定する。検査条件が変更されると、Ｓ１３に戻る。検査条件が変更されていなければ、ＭＣＵ３０はＳ１６に進む。なお、Ｓ８の検査条件の変更は画像の再取得が必要になるような検査条件の変更が想定されている。Ｓ１５の検査条件の変更は取得された画像に対する画像処理の変更をもたらすが、画像の再取得は不要なものが想定されている。　 In S15, the MCU 30 determines whether inspection conditions such as image processing and counting algorithm have been changed. When the inspection conditions are changed, the process returns to S13. If the inspection conditions have not been changed, the MCU 30 proceeds to S16. It should be noted that the change in the inspection conditions in S8 is assumed to be a change in the inspection conditions that would require reacquisition of the image. Although the change in inspection conditions in S15 results in a change in image processing for the acquired image, it is assumed that re-acquisition of the image is unnecessary.　
Ｓ１６でＭＣＵ３０は、ユーザにより登録指示が入力されたかどうかを判定する。ユーザは、登録ボタンとして割当たられたヘッド装置１ａの第二ハードウエアボタン８ｂまたはＵＩ１００の第二ソフトウエアボタン１０５ｂを押すことで、登録指示を入力できる。登録指示が入力されていなければ、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ１６からＳ８に戻り、撮りなおしを実行したり、検査条件を変更したりする。登録指示が入力されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ１６からＳ１７に進む。　 In S16, the MCU 30 determines whether a registration instruction has been input by the user. The user can input a registration instruction by pressing the second hardware button 8b of the head device 1a or the second software button 105b of the UI 100, which is assigned as a registration button. If no registration instruction has been input, the MCU 30 returns from S16 to S8, and retakes the image or changes the inspection conditions. When the registration instruction is input, the MCU 30 proceeds from S16 to S17.　
Ｓ１７でＭＣＵ３０は、カウント結果をアクティブセルに登録する。　 In S17, the MCU 30 registers the count result in the active cell.　
Ｓ１８でＭＣＵ３０は、カウントがすべて終了したかどうかを判定する。たとえば、カウント表に存在するすべてのセルにカウント結果が入力されていれば、ＭＣＵ３０は、カウント終了と判定する。まだ、未入力のセルが存在している場合、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ１８からＳ５に進み、アクティブセルを次のセルに変更する（セルの特定）。　 In S18, the MCU 30 determines whether all counts have been completed. For example, if count results have been input to all cells in the count table, the MCU 30 determines that counting has ended. If there are still uninput cells, the MCU 30 proceeds from S18 to S5 and changes the active cell to the next cell (cell identification).　
（２）ヘッド装置１ａの主な処理　図３５は、ヘッド装置１ａのＭＣＵ２０が制御プログラムにしたがって実行する一連の処理を示す。　 (2) Main processes of the head device 1a FIG. 35 shows a series of processes executed by the MCU 20 of the head device 1a according to the control program.　
Ｓ２１でＭＣＵ２０は、フロントカメラ１０に対する撮影の指示を受信したかどうかを判定する。上述されたように検査リスト２２０の識別画像２２１を読み取る場合、フロントカメラ１０に対する撮影の指示（コードを読み取り指示）がＰＣ１ｂからヘッド装置１ａへ入力される。フロントカメラ１０に対する撮影の指示が入力されていなければ、ＭＣＵ２０は、Ｓ２１からＳ２３に進む。フロントカメラ１０に対する撮影の指示が入力されると、ＭＣＵ２０は、Ｓ２１からＳ２２に進む。　 In S21, the MCU 20 determines whether or not an instruction for photographing the front camera 10 has been received. When reading the identification image 221 of the inspection list 220 as described above, an instruction for photographing the front camera 10 (instruction to read a code) is input from the PC 1b to the head device 1a. If no photographing instruction for the front camera 10 has been input, the MCU 20 proceeds from S21 to S23. When a photographing instruction for the front camera 10 is input, the MCU 20 proceeds from S21 to S22.　
Ｓ２２でＭＣＵ２０は、フロントカメラ１０を起動して画像（フロントカメラ画像）を取得し、フロントカメラ画像またはシンボルのデコード結果をＰＣ１ｂへ送信する。　 In S22, the MCU 20 activates the front camera 10 to acquire an image (front camera image), and transmits the front camera image or the decoding result of the symbol to the PC 1b.　
Ｓ２３でＭＣＵ２０は、ＰＣ１ｂから検査条件を受信し、記憶装置２５に保存する。　 In S23, the MCU 20 receives the test conditions from the PC 1b and stores them in the storage device 25.　
Ｓ２４でＭＣＵ２０は、検査条件を各部に設定する。検査条件のうち感度は撮像制御部２１に設定される。点灯すべき照明装置、明るさ、照明方向などは照明制御部２２に設定される。　 In S24, the MCU 20 sets inspection conditions for each part. Among the inspection conditions, sensitivity is set in the imaging control section 21. The lighting device to be lit, brightness, lighting direction, etc. are set in the lighting control unit 22.　
Ｓ２５でＭＣＵ２０は、ＰＣ１ｂから検査条件の変更指示が受信されたかどうかを判定する。変更指示は、新しい検査条件とともに受信される。検査条件の変更指示が受信されると、ＭＣＵ２０は、Ｓ２４に戻り、新しい検査条件を設定する。変更指示が受信されていなければ、ＭＣＵ２０は、Ｓ２５からＳ２６に進む。　 In S25, the MCU 20 determines whether an instruction to change the test conditions has been received from the PC 1b. Change instructions are received along with new test conditions. When the instruction to change the test conditions is received, the MCU 20 returns to S24 and sets new test conditions. If the change instruction has not been received, the MCU 20 proceeds from S25 to S26.　
Ｓ２６でＭＣＵ２０は、ＰＣ１ｂから撮像指示が受信されたかどうかを判定する。撮像指示が入力されていなければ、ＭＣＵ２０は、Ｓ２６からＳ２５に戻る。撮像指示が入力されると、ＭＣＵ２０は、Ｓ２６からＳ２７に進む。　 In S26, the MCU 20 determines whether an imaging instruction has been received from the PC 1b. If no imaging instruction has been input, the MCU 20 returns to S25 from S26. When the imaging instruction is input, the MCU 20 proceeds from S26 to S27.　
Ｓ２７でＭＣＵ２０は、メインカメ
ラ１１を起動して検査画像を取得し、検査画像をＰＣ１ｂへ送信する。　 In S27, the MCU 20 activates the main camera 11 to acquire an inspection image, and transmits the inspection image to the PC 1b.
Ｓ２８でＭＣＵ２０は、ヘッド装置１ａからカウント指示が入力されたかどうかを判定する。カウント指示が入力されていなければ、ＭＣＵ２０は、Ｓ２８からＳ２５に戻る。カウント指示が入力されると、ＭＣＵ２０は、Ｓ２８からＳ２９に進む。　 In S28, the MCU 20 determines whether a count instruction has been input from the head device 1a. If no count instruction has been input, the MCU 20 returns to S25 from S28. When the count instruction is input, the MCU 20 proceeds from S28 to S29.　
Ｓ２９でＭＣＵ２０は、検査条件にしたがってコロニーのカウントを実行する。　 In S29, the MCU 20 performs colony counting according to the test conditions.　
Ｓ３０でＭＣＵ２０は、カウント結果をＰＣ１ｂへ送信する。　 In S30, the MCU 20 transmits the count result to the PC 1b.　
Ｓ３１でＭＣＵ２０は、カウント終了指示を受信したかどうかを判定する。カウント終了指示が受信されると、ＭＣＵ２０は、カウントを終了する。カウント終了指示が受信されていなければ、ＭＣＵ２０は、Ｓ３１からＳ２３に戻り、次のセルについての検査条件を受信する。　 In S31, the MCU 20 determines whether a count end instruction has been received. When the count end instruction is received, the MCU 20 ends counting. If the count end instruction has not been received, the MCU 20 returns from S31 to S23 and receives the test conditions for the next cell.　
（３）サンプルデータベースの登録　カウント表は複数の行および列を有し、さらに各セルには検査条件が関連付けられている。カウント表や検査リストは、日ごとに作り替えられることがある。ただし、同一のサンプルについて毎日検査が実行されることもある。したがって、検査頻度の多いサンプルについては、サンプルＤＢ４０に予め登録しておくことで、カウント表の作成処理の負担が軽減される。そこで、サンプル表を作成したときに、ユーザは、各サンプルに対応する行要素をサンプルＤＢ４０に登録してもよい。　 (3) Registration of sample database The count table has multiple rows and columns, and each cell is associated with an inspection condition. Count tables and inspection lists may be revised daily. However, tests may be performed on the same sample every day. Therefore, by registering samples that are frequently tested in the sample DB 40 in advance, the burden of creating a count table can be reduced. Therefore, when creating a sample table, the user may register row elements corresponding to each sample in the sample DB 40.　
図３６は、ＰＣ１ｂのＭＣＵ３０により実行されるサンプルＤＢ４０の編集処理を示すフローチャートである。ＭＣＵ３０は、記憶装置３５に記憶されたアプリケーションプログラム３９にしたがって以下の処理を実行する。　 FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the sample DB 40 editing process executed by the MCU 30 of the PC 1b. The MCU 30 executes the following processing according to the application program 39 stored in the storage device 35.　
Ｓ４１でＭＣＵ３０は、カウント表に含まれる複数の行要素のうちサンプルＤＢ４０に登録したい行要素の選択を受け付ける。たとえば、ＭＣＵ３０は、サンプル表に含まれる行要素のうちいずれかの行要素に対するポインタ５７によるクリックを受け付けてもよい。　 In S41, the MCU 30 accepts selection of a row element desired to be registered in the sample DB 40 from among a plurality of row elements included in the count table. For example, the MCU 30 may accept a click by the pointer 57 on any of the row elements included in the sample table.　
Ｓ４２でＭＣＵ３０は、選択された行要素の追加指示を受け付ける。たとえば、行要素が選択された状態でポインタ５７により右クリックが実行されると、追加指示が入力されてもよい。　 In S42, the MCU 30 receives an instruction to add the selected row element. For example, when a right click is performed with the pointer 57 while a row element is selected, an additional instruction may be input.　
Ｓ４３でＭＣＵ３０は、追加指示された行要素のサンプル名を取得し、同一のサンプル名がすでにサンプルＤＢ４０に登録済みであるかどうかを判定する（重複判定）。追加指示された行要素が既に存在しなければ、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ４３からＳ４５に進む。追加指示された行要素がサンプルＤＢ４０に存在すれば、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ４３からＳ４４に進む。　 In S43, the MCU 30 acquires the sample name of the row element for which addition has been instructed, and determines whether the same sample name has already been registered in the sample DB 40 (duplication determination). If the row element specified to be added does not already exist, the MCU 30 proceeds from S43 to S45. If the row element specified to be added exists in the sample DB 40, the MCU 30 proceeds from S43 to S44.　
Ｓ４４でＭＣＵ３０は、サンプルＤＢ４０に行要素を上書きするかどうかをユーザに問い合わせる。キャンセル指示が入力されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、行要素の追加をキャンセルする。上書き指示が入力されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ４４からＳ４５に進む。　 In S44, the MCU 30 asks the user whether to overwrite the row element in the sample DB 40. When the cancel instruction is input, the MCU 30 cancels the addition of the row element. When the overwrite instruction is input, the MCU 30 proceeds from S44 to S45.　
Ｓ４５でＭＣＵ３０は、追加対象の行要素を構成している項目名（例：サンプル名、菌種、培地タイプ、希釈倍率）を取得する。　 In S45, the MCU 30 acquires the item names (eg, sample name, bacterial species, culture medium type, dilution ratio) that constitute the row element to be added.　
Ｓ４６でＭＣＵ３０は、行要素のセルに関連付けられている検査条件を記憶装置３５から取得する。　 In S46, the MCU 30 acquires the inspection conditions associated with the cells of the row elements from the storage device 35.　
Ｓ４７でＭＣＵ３０は、項目名と検査条件をサンプルＤＢ４０に登録する。　 In S47, the MCU 30 registers the item name and inspection conditions in the sample DB 40.　
Ｓ４８でＭＣＵ３０は、ＵＩ５０におけるサンプルＤＢ４０の表示を更新する。　 In S48, the MCU 30 updates the display of the sample DB 40 on the UI 50.　
（４）カウント表の編集　図３７は、ＰＣ１ｂのＭＣＵ３０により実行されるカウント表の編集処理を示すフローチャートである。ＭＣＵ３０は、記憶装置３５に記憶されたカウントアプリケーションプログラムにしたがって以下の処理を実行する。　 (4) Count table editing FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the count table editing process executed by the MCU 30 of the PC 1b. The MCU 30 executes the following processing according to the count application program stored in the storage device 35.　
Ｓ５１でＭＣＵ３０は、カウント表において新しく行要素を追加される位置（セルまたは行）を特定する。たとえば、ＭＣＵ３０は、カウント表においてサンプル名が入力済みである最終行の次の行を選択する。なお、ある行と別の行との間に新たな行が選択されてもよい。たとえば、カウント表においてサンプル名が入力済みである行が選択され、ポインタ５７による右クリックが実行されると、選択された行の次に空行が追加される。　 In S51, the MCU 30 identifies a position (cell or row) in the count table where a new row element is to be added. For example, the MCU 30 selects the next row after the last row in which the sample name has been input in the count table. Note that a new row may be selected between a certain row and another row. For example, when a row in which a sample name has already been input is selected in the count table and a right click is performed using the pointer 57, a blank row is added next to the selected row.　
Ｓ５２でＭＣＵ３０は、サンプルＤＢ４０から行の追加が指示されたかどうかを判定する。たとえば、ＵＩ５０のボタン６４が押されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、サンプルＤＢ４０から行の追加が指示されたと認識する。サンプルＤＢ４０から行の追加が指示されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ５３に進む。サンプルＤＢ４０から行の追加が指示されていなければ、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ６１に進む。　 In S52, the MCU 30 determines whether an instruction to add a row has been given from the sample DB 40. For example, when the button 64 on the UI 50 is pressed, the MCU 30 recognizes that the sample DB 40 has instructed to add a row. When the sample DB 40 instructs to add a row, the MCU 30 proceeds to S53. If there is no instruction to add a row from the sample DB 40, the MCU 30 proceeds to S61.　
Ｓ５３でＭＣＵ３０は、追加指示された行の項目名をサンプルＤＢ４０から取得する。　 In S53, the MCU 30 acquires the item name of the line for which addition has been instructed from the sample DB 40.　
Ｓ５４でＭＣＵ３０は、追加指示された行の検査条件をサンプルＤＢ４０から取得する。　 In S54, the MCU 30 acquires the inspection conditions of the row for which addition has been instructed from the sample DB 40.　
Ｓ５５でＭＣＵ３０は、取得された項目名と検査条件とをカウント表に貼り付ける。つまり、ＭＣＵ３０は新規の行要素をカウント表に追加する。なお、ＭＣＵ３０は、サンプルＤＢ４０に保持されている複数の行要素のうちユーザにより指定された行要素が新規のカウント表に含まれているか否かを判定してもよい。さらに、ユーザにより指定された行要素が新規のカウント表に含まれていないと判定された場合、ＭＣＵ３０は、ユーザにより指定された行要素が新規のカウント表に含まれていない列要素のセルを含むか否かを判定してもよい。ユーザにより指定された行要素が新規のカウント表に含まれていない列要素のセルを含むと判定された場合、ＭＣＵ３０は、当該列要素を新規のカウント表に追加する。つまり、すでにカウント表に存在する他のサンプル名を付与された行要素にも列要素が追加されることになる。　 In S55, the MCU 30 pastes the acquired item names and inspection conditions onto the count table. That is, the MCU 30 adds a new row element to the count table. Note that the MCU 30 may determine whether a row element specified by the user among the plurality of row elements held in the sample DB 40 is included in the new count table. Further, if it is determined that the row element specified by the user is not included in the new count table, the MCU 30 selects a column element cell whose row element specified by the user is not included in the new count table. It may be determined whether or not it is included. If it is determined that the row element specified by the user includes a cell of a column element that is not included in the new count table, the MCU 30 adds the column element to the new count table. In other words, column elements are added to row elements that are already in the count table and are given other sample names.　
Ｓ５６でＭＣＵ３０は、編集完了かどうかを判定する。ユーザにより編集完了が指示されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、カウント表を記憶装置３５に保存する。ユーザにより編集完了が指示されなければ、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ５６からＳ５１に戻る。　 In S56, the MCU 30 determines whether editing is complete. When the user instructs to complete the editing, the MCU 30 stores the count table in the storage device 35. If editing completion is not instructed by the user, the MCU 30 returns to S51 from S56.　
サンプルＤＢ４０を利用せずに新規に行が追加される場合、Ｓ６１でＭＣＵ３０は、キーボード３２やポインティングデバイス３３を通じた項目名の入力を受け付ける。　 When a new row is added without using the sample DB 40, the MCU 30 receives input of an item name through the keyboard 32 or pointing device 33 in S61.　
Ｓ６２でＭＣＵ３０は、キーボード３２やポインティングデバイス３３を通じた検査条件の入力を受け付ける。　 In S62, the MCU 30 accepts input of inspection conditions through the keyboard 32 or pointing device 33.　
Ｓ６３でＭＣＵ３０は、取得された項目名と検査条件とをカウント表に書き込む。その後、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ５６に進む。　 In S63, the MCU 30 writes the acquired item names and inspection conditions into the count table. After that, the MCU 30 proceeds to S56.　
（５）カウント表の特定　図３８は、ＰＣ１ｂのＭＣＵ３０により実行されるカウント表の特定処理を示すフローチャートである。ＭＣＵ３０は、記憶装置３５に記憶されたカウントアプリケーションプログラムにしたがって以下の処理を実行する。　 (5) Count table identification FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the count table identification process executed by the MCU 30 of the PC 1b. The MCU 30 executes the following processing according to the count application program stored in the storage device 35.　
Ｓ７１でＭＣＵ３０は、フロントカメラ１０の起動指示が入力されたどうかを判定する。たとえば、図２６に示されたファイルＵＩ２００のボタン２１４がクリックされると、ＭＣＵ３０は、起動指示が入力されたと判定し、Ｓ７２に進む。　 In S71, the MCU 30 determines whether an instruction to start the front camera 10 has been input. For example, when the button 214 of the file UI 200 shown in FIG. 26 is clicked, the MCU 30 determines that a startup instruction has been input, and proceeds to S72.　
Ｓ７２でＭＣＵ３０は、フロントカメラ１０の起動指示をヘッド装置１ａへ送信する。　 In S72, the MCU 30 transmits an instruction to start the front camera 10 to the head device 1a.　
Ｓ７３でＭＣＵ３０は、ヘッド装置１ａにおいて識別画像２２１の読取が成功するのを待つ。　 In S73, the MCU 30 waits for the head device 1a to successfully read the identification image 221.　
Ｓ７４でＭＣＵ３０は、ヘッド装置１ａにおいて識別画像２２１からデコードされた識別情報を取得する。　 In S74, the MCU 30 acquires the identification information decoded from the identification image 221 in the head device 1a.　
Ｓ７５でＭＣＵ３０は、記憶装置３５において、識別情報に対応するカウント表を検索する。　 In S75, the MCU 30 searches the storage device 35 for a count table corresponding to the identification information.　
Ｓ７６でＭＣＵ３０は、識別情報に対応するカウント表が発見されたかどうかを判定する。カウント表が存在しない場合、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ７１に戻る。カウント表が存在した場合、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ７７に進む。　 In S76, the MCU 30 determines whether a count table corresponding to the identification information has been found. If the count table does not exist, the MCU 30 returns to S71. If the count table exists, the MCU 30 proceeds to S77.　
Ｓ７７でＭＣＵ３０は、カウント表を記憶装置３５から読み出し、ＵＩ１００にセットする。　 In S77, the MCU 30 reads the count table from the storage device 35 and sets it in the UI 100.　
Ｓ７１で起動指示が入力されていなければ、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ７８に進む。Ｓ７８でＭＣＵ３０は、カウント表の検索画面を表示装置３７に表示する。Ｓ７９でＭＣＵ３０は、カウント表の選択を受け付ける。たとえば、図２６に示されたファイルＵＩ２００においていずれかカウント表が選択されてもよい。その後、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ７７に進む。　 If no activation instruction has been input in S71, the MCU 30 proceeds to S78. In S78, the MCU 30 displays a count table search screen on the display device 37. In S79, the MCU 30 accepts the selection of a count table. For example, any count table may be selected in the file UI 200 shown in FIG. 26. After that, the MCU 30 proceeds to S77.　
（６）コロニーのカウント　図３９は、ヘッド装置１ａのＭＣＵ２０が制御プログラムにしがって実行するコロニーのカウント処理を示す。ただし、画像処理やカウント処理は、ＭＣＵ３０により実行されてもよい。　 (6) Colony Counting FIG. 39 shows the colony counting process executed by the MCU 20 of the head device 1a according to the control program. However, the image processing and counting processing may be performed by the MCU 30.　
Ｓ８１でＭＣＵ２０は、ＰＣ１ｂから受信された検査条件からカウントアルゴリズムを取得する。具体的には、カウントアルゴリズムにおいて使用される画像処理や閾値パラメータ（例：二値化閾値）が取得される。　 In S81, the MCU 20 acquires a count algorithm from the inspection conditions received from the PC 1b. Specifically, image processing and threshold parameters (eg, binarization threshold) used in the counting algorithm are acquired.　
Ｓ８２でＭＣＵ２０は、メインカメラ１１により取得された検査画像にカウントアルゴリズムを適用する。たとえば、ＨＤＲやリング除去などの画像処理が検査画像に適用される。　 In S82, the MCU 20 applies a counting algorithm to the inspection image acquired by the main camera 11. For example, image processing such as HDR and ring removal is applied to the inspection image.　
Ｓ８３でＭＣＵ２０は、検査条件（閾値パラメータ）にしたがって検査画像に含まれるコロニーをカウントする。　 In S83, the MCU 20 counts colonies included in the test image according to the test conditions (threshold parameters).　
（７）自由列（例：備考セル）への情報の登録　図４０は、ＰＣ１ｂのＭＣＵ３０により実行される備考セル等の自由列への情報登録処理を示すフローチャートである。ＭＣＵ３０は、記憶装置３５に記憶されたカウントアプリケーションプログラムにしたがって以下の処理を実行する。　 (7) Information Registration in Free Columns (Example: Note Cells) FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the process of registering information in free columns such as note cells, which is executed by the MCU 30 of the PC 1b. The MCU 30 executes the following processing according to the count application program stored in the storage device 35.　
Ｓ９１でＭＣＵ３０は、備考セルの選択を受け付ける。ここでは一例として備考セルが挙げられているが、他の自由列のセルであってもよい。ＭＣＵ３０は、ポインタ５７により選択された備考セルをアクティブセルに設定する。　 In S91, the MCU 30 accepts the selection of a comment cell. Here, a comment cell is mentioned as an example, but it may be a cell in another free column. The MCU 30 sets the remark cell selected by the pointer 57 as an active cell.　
Ｓ９２でＭＣＵ３０は、備考セルの属性を特定する。各セルには、属性（例：カウント値、文字列、画像）が予め付与されていてもよい。ＭＣＵ３０は、各セルの属性を記憶装置３５から読み出する。　 In S92, the MCU 30 specifies the attribute of the comment cell. Each cell may be given an attribute (eg, count value, character string, image) in advance. The MCU 30 reads the attributes of each cell from the storage device 35.　
Ｓ９３でＭＣＵ３０は、フロントカメラの起動が指示されたかどうかを判定する。フロントカメラ１０の起動が指示されなければ、ＭＣＵ３０は、キーボード３２等から入力されたテキストを備考セルに入力する。一方、起動指示が入力されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ９４に進む。　 In S93, the MCU 30 determines whether activation of the front camera has been instructed. If activation of the front camera 10 is not instructed, the MCU 30 inputs the text input from the keyboard 32 or the like into the remarks cell. On the other hand, when the activation instruction is input, the MCU 30 proceeds to S94.　
Ｓ９４でＭＣＵ３０は、ヘッド装置１ａのフロントカメラ１０を起動する。　 In S94, the MCU 30 activates the front camera 10 of the head device 1a.　
Ｓ９５でＭＣＵ３０は、フロントカメラ１０により画像を取得する。　 In S95, the MCU 30 acquires an image using the front camera 10.　
Ｓ９６でＭＣＵ３０は、特定された属性が画像かどうかを判定する。属性が画像である場合、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ９７に進む。　 In S96, the MCU 30 determines whether the specified attribute is an image. If the attribute is an image, the MCU 30 proceeds to S97.　
Ｓ９７でＭＣＵ３０は、フロントカメラ１０により取得された画像（例：商品の外観画像）を備考セルに関連付ける。　 In S97, the MCU 30 associates the image acquired by the front camera 10 (eg, the exterior image of the product) with the remarks cell.　
Ｓ９６で、特定された属性が画像でないと判定されると、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ９８に進む。　 If it is determined in S96 that the specified attribute is not an image, the MCU 30 proceeds to S98.　
Ｓ９８でＭＣＵ３０は、フロントカメラ１０により取得された画像のデコード結果をヘッド装置１ａから取得する。　 In S98, the MCU 30 acquires the decoding result of the image acquired by the front camera 10 from the head device 1a.　
Ｓ９９でＭＣＵ３０は、取得された情報（デコード結果（例：商品のシリアル番号など））を備考セルに書き込む。　 In S99, the MCU 30 writes the acquired information (decoding result (eg, product serial number, etc.)) into the remarks cell.　
［ハレーション（光沢）低減］　コロニーに対して照明光を照射すると、コロニーにハレーションが発生することがある。ハレーションが発生すると、画素値が飽和してしまうため、その画素の情報が失われてしまう。その結果、コロニーのカウント値に誤差が生じてしまうことがある。特に、コロニーの色に基づきコロニーの種別を分類することは困難となる。また、培地の種別によってはハレーションが生じやすいことがある。そこで、本実施例では、ハレーションの影響を低減することでコロニーの計数精度を向上させる。　 [Reducing halation (glossy)] When illuminating a colony with illumination light, halation may occur in the colony. When halation occurs, the pixel value becomes saturated and information about that pixel is lost. As a result, errors may occur in colony count values. In particular, it is difficult to classify the type of colony based on the color of the colony. Further, depending on the type of medium, halation may easily occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, colony counting accuracy is improved by reducing the influence of halation.　
図４２は、ハレーションの一例を示す図である。培地にも様々なものがあるが、最も多いものはシャーレ１５に入れられた液体状の培地である。図４２の左側が示すように、シャーレ１５に対して全方向から一様に照明光を照射すると、コロニーの輪郭にハレーション（リング）が発生することがある。図４２が示すようなフィルム状の培地ではフィルムの表面に
生じる起伏によってハレーションが発生することがある。そこで、本実施例では、ハレーションを低減するための処理（以下、光沢低減処理）が採用される。これにより、図４２の右側の画像が示すように、ハレーションが低減される。　 FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of halation. There are various types of culture medium, but the most common one is a liquid culture medium placed in a petri dish 15. As shown on the left side of FIG. 42, when the petri dish 15 is uniformly irradiated with illumination light from all directions, halation (ring) may occur on the outline of the colony. In a film-like culture medium as shown in FIG. 42, halation may occur due to undulations occurring on the surface of the film. Therefore, in this embodiment, a process for reducing halation (hereinafter referred to as gloss reduction process) is adopted. This reduces halation, as shown in the image on the right side of FIG. 42.
図４３は、リング照明装置１２、１３における複数の発光素子１２ａの配置を示している。この例では、基板４００上に３２個の発光素子１２ａが円環状に並べられている。ＭＣＵ２０は、３２個の発光素子１２ａのうち、任意の個数の発光素子１２ａを点灯させることができる。　 FIG. 43 shows the arrangement of the plurality of light emitting elements 12a in the ring illumination devices 12 and 13. In this example, 32 light emitting elements 12a are arranged in an annular shape on the substrate 400. The MCU 20 can light up any number of light emitting elements 12a among the 32 light emitting elements 12a.　
図４４は、四つの照明方向ｉ～ｉｖを実現するための点灯パターンを示している。点灯パターンｉは、図４４において上方に位置する８個の発光素子１２ａを点灯させるパターンである。点灯パターンｉｉは、図４４において右方に位置する８個の発光素子１２ａを点灯させるパターンである。点灯パターンｉｉｉは、図４４において下方に位置する８個の発光素子１２ａを点灯させるパターンである。点灯パターンｉｖは、図４４において左方に位置する８個の発光素子１２ａを点灯させるパターンである。これらの点灯パターンは一例にすぎない。たとえば、３２個の発光素子１２ａのうち連続して配置された４個の発光素子１２ａを順番に点灯させることで、８個の照明方向を実現することができる。３２個の発光素子１２ａをすべて点灯させることで、全方向照明が実現される。なお、明るさを半分に低減するために、一つ置きに発光素子１２ａが点灯されてもよい。　 FIG. 44 shows lighting patterns for realizing four lighting directions i to iv. The lighting pattern i is a pattern in which the eight light emitting elements 12a located above in FIG. 44 are lit. The lighting pattern ii is a pattern in which eight light emitting elements 12a located on the right side in FIG. 44 are lit. Lighting pattern iii is a pattern in which eight light emitting elements 12a located at the bottom in FIG. 44 are lit. The lighting pattern iv is a pattern in which eight light emitting elements 12a located on the left side in FIG. 44 are lit. These lighting patterns are just examples. For example, by sequentially lighting up four consecutively arranged light emitting elements 12a among the 32 light emitting elements 12a, eight illumination directions can be realized. Omnidirectional illumination is realized by lighting all 32 light emitting elements 12a. Note that in order to reduce the brightness by half, the light emitting elements 12a may be turned on every other light emitting element 12a.　
図４５は、光沢低減処理の一例を説明する図である。この例で、画像データ４０１ａは、照明方向ｉから検査個体を照明することでメインカメラ１１により取得された画像データである。画像データ４０１ｂは、照明方向ｉｉから検査個体を照明することでメインカメラ１１により取得された画像データである。画像データ４０１ｃは、照明方向ｉｉｉから検査個体を照明することでメインカメラ１１により取得された画像データである。画像データ４０１ｄは、照明方向ｉｖから検査個体を照明することでメインカメラ１１により取得された画像データである。　 FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example of gloss reduction processing. In this example, the image data 401a is image data acquired by the main camera 11 by illuminating the inspection object from the illumination direction i. The image data 401b is image data acquired by the main camera 11 by illuminating the inspection object from the illumination direction ii. The image data 401c is image data acquired by the main camera 11 by illuminating the inspection object from the illumination direction iii. The image data 401d is image data acquired by the main camera 11 by illuminating the inspection object from the illumination direction iv.　
ＭＣＵ２０またはＭＣＵ３０は、四つの画像データ４０１ａないし画像データ４０１ｄを合成することで、光沢低減画像４０２を作成し、光沢低減画像４０２におけるコロニーをカウントする。　 The MCU 20 or MCU 30 creates a reduced gloss image 402 by combining the four image data 401a to 401d, and counts colonies in the reduced gloss image 402.　
たとえば、ＭＣＵ２０またはＭＣＵ３０は、四つの画像データ４０１ａないし画像データ４０１ｄにおいて同一の座標に位置する画素を注目画素として順番に選択する。座標がｘ，ｙであるとすると、画像データ４０１ａにおける注目画素Ｐａ（ｘ，ｙ）、画像データ４０１ｂにおける注目画素Ｐｂ（ｘ，ｙ）、画像データ４０１ｃにおける注目画素Ｐｃ（ｘ，ｙ）、および、画像データ４０１ｄにおける注目画素Ｐｄ（ｘ，ｙ）が抽出される。このうちで、ハレーションを起こしている画素は、合成に用いられない。たとえば、Ｐａ（ｘ，ｙ）が飽和しているが、Ｐｂ（ｘ，ｙ）、Ｐｃ（ｘ，ｙ）、およびＰｄ（ｘ，ｙ）が飽和していなかった場合、光沢低減画像における注目画素Ｐｐ（ｘ，ｙ）は、以下のように算出される。Ｐｐ（ｘ，ｙ）＝（Ｐｂ（ｘ，ｙ）＋Ｐｃ（ｘ，ｙ）＋Ｐｄ（ｘ，ｙ））／３　・・・（１）これを光沢低減画像４０２におけるすべての座標（画素）について順番に実行することで、光沢低減画像４０２が生成される。　 For example, the MCU 20 or MCU 30 sequentially selects pixels located at the same coordinates in the four image data 401a to 401d as the pixel of interest. Assuming that the coordinates are x, y, the pixel of interest Pa (x, y) in the image data 401a, the pixel of interest Pb (x, y) in the image data 401b, the pixel of interest Pc (x, y) in the image data 401c, and , the pixel of interest Pd(x,y) in the image data 401d is extracted. Among these pixels, pixels causing halation are not used for composition. For example, if Pa (x, y) is saturated but Pb (x, y), Pc (x, y), and Pd (x, y) are not saturated, the pixel of interest in the gloss-reduced image Pp(x,y) is calculated as follows. Pp (x, y) = (Pb (x, y) + Pc (x, y) + Pd (x, y)) / 3 ... (1) This is done in order for all coordinates (pixels) in the reduced gloss image 402 By executing this, a reduced gloss image 402 is generated.　
ハレーションなどの光沢を低減することで次のようなメリットが得られる。（１）コロニーの色が明確となる。これにより、ＭＣＵ２０、３０は、複数のコロニー（菌種）を色で区別することが可能となる。これにより、菌種ごとのコロニーの計数精度が向上する。（２）コロニーを上方（メインカメラ１１側）から見たときの形状（二次元形状、輪郭）が明確となる。ＭＣＵ２０、３０は、検査画像（光沢低減画像）を二値化してからコロニーを計数することがある。この場合、コロニーの輪郭が明確になると、コロニーの計数精度が向上する。（３）光沢をもつコロニーと光沢を持たないコロニーとを分類することが可能となる。ＭＣＵ２０、３０は、全方向照明画像から光沢をもつコロニーをカウントし、光沢低減画像から光沢を持たないコロニーをカウントできる。つまり、光沢をもつコロニーと光沢を持たないコロニーとを分類することが可能となる。なお、ＭＣＵ２０、３０は、四つの画像データ４０１ａないし画像データ４０１ｄを加算合成することで、全方向照明画像を生成してもよい。　 The following benefits can be obtained by reducing gloss such as halation. (1) The color of the colony becomes clear. This allows the MCUs 20 and 30 to distinguish between multiple colonies (bacterial species) by color. This improves the accuracy of counting colonies for each bacterial species. (2) The shape (two-dimensional shape, outline) when the colony is viewed from above (main camera 11 side) becomes clear. The MCUs 20 and 30 may count colonies after binarizing the inspection image (reduced gloss image). In this case, when the outline of the colony becomes clearer, the accuracy of counting the colonies improves. (3) It becomes possible to classify colonies with gloss and colonies without gloss. The MCUs 20 and 30 can count colonies with gloss from the omnidirectional illumination image and count colonies without gloss from the reduced gloss image. In other words, it is possible to classify colonies with gloss and colonies without gloss. Note that the MCUs 20 and 30 may generate the omnidirectional illumination image by adding and combining the four image data 401a to 401d.　
また、ＭＣＵ２０、３０は、光沢低減画像においてコロニーが存在する画素領域（コロニー領域）を二値化し、二値化された領域と、全方向照明画像（光沢非低減画像）における対応する領域とを重畳し、コロニー領域上にどの程度の比率で光沢が存在するかを表示してもよい。また、ＭＣＵ２０、３０は、コロニー領域における光沢領域の割合（比率）を演算してもよい。ＭＣＵ２０、３０は、光沢比率が閾値を超えていれば、コロニー領域を光沢コロニーと分類してもよい。ＭＣＵ２０、３０は、光沢比率が閾値以下であれば、コロニー領域を非光沢コロニーと分類してもよい。なお、コロニーが光沢を有する場合、コロニーが高さ方向に成長していることを意味する。つまり、ＭＣＵ２０、３０は、高さ方向に成長したコロニーをカウントすることができる。　 Furthermore, the MCUs 20 and 30 binarize the pixel area where a colony exists (colony area) in the gloss-reduced image, and compare the binarized area and the corresponding area in the omnidirectional illumination image (non-glossy-reduced image). They may be superimposed and the ratio of gloss present on the colony area may be displayed. Furthermore, the MCUs 20 and 30 may calculate the proportion (ratio) of the glossy area in the colony area. The MCUs 20 and 30 may classify the colony area as a gloss colony if the gloss ratio exceeds the threshold value. The MCUs 20 and 30 may classify the colony area as a non-glossy colony if the gloss ratio is less than or equal to the threshold value. Note that when the colony is shiny, it means that the colony is growing in the height direction. That is, the MCUs 20 and 30 can count colonies that have grown in the height direction.　
図４６は、光沢低減画像に対して光沢非低減画像を重畳して生成した画像を示す。実線の矩形は、非光沢コロニーを示す。破線は、光沢コロニーを示す。このように、ＭＣＵ２０、３０は、高さ方向に成長したコロニーを発見することができる。　 FIG. 46 shows an image generated by superimposing a non-glossy image on a glossy-reduced image. Solid rectangles indicate non-glossy colonies. Dashed lines indicate shiny colonies. In this way, the MCUs 20 and 30 can discover colonies that have grown in the height direction.　
図４７は、カウント設定ＵＩ４１０を示している。カウント設定ＵＩ４１０は、培地の種別を選択するためのメニュー４１１を有している。メニュー４１１は、菌種分類評価を含む。ＭＣＵ３０は、菌種分類評価が選択されると、ユーザの追加の指示を待たずに、チェックボックス４２０にチェックを入れて、リング除去（光沢低減処理）を有効化してもよい。ユーザはポインタ５７を操作してチェックボックス４２０をオン（チェック）／オフ（非チェック）できる。ユーザがポインタ５７を操作してチェックボックス４２０からチェックを外した場合、ＭＣＵ３０は、光沢低減処理（光沢低減モード）を無効化し、光沢非低減処理（光沢非低減モード）を有効化する。このように、ＭＣＵ３０は、培地の種別に応じて、光沢低減モードまたは光沢非低減モードを選択してもよい。　 FIG. 47 shows the count setting UI 410. The count setting UI 410 has a menu 411 for selecting the type of medium. Menu 411 includes bacterial species classification evaluation. When the bacterial species classification evaluation is selected, the MCU 30 may check the check box 420 to enable ring removal (glossy reduction processing) without waiting for additional instructions from the user. The user can turn on (check)/off (uncheck) the check box 420 by operating the pointer 57. When the user operates the pointer 57 to uncheck the checkbox 420, the MCU 30 disables the gloss reduction process (glossy reduction mode) and enables the non-glossy reduction process (non-glossy reduction mode). In this way, the MCU 30 may select the gloss reduction mode or the non-glossy reduction mode depending on the type of medium.　
チェックボックス４２０がチェックされると、ＭＣＵ３０は、暫定的に光沢低減モードに移行してもよい。ＭＣＵ３０は、リング照明装置１２に点灯パターンｉを設定し、メインカメラ１１に検査個体を撮影させ、画像データ４０１ａを取得する。ＭＣＵ３０は、リング照明装置１２に点灯パターンｉｉを設定し、メインカメラ１１に検査個体を撮影させ、画像データ４０１ｂを取得する。ＭＣＵ３０は、リング照明装置１２に点灯パターンｉｉｉを設定し、メインカメラ１１に検査個体を撮影させ、画像データ４０１ｃを取得する。ＭＣＵ３０は、リング照明装置１２に点灯パターンｉｖを設定し、メインカメラ１１に検査個体を撮影させ、画像データ４０１ｄを取得する。ＭＣＵ３０は、画像データ４０１ａ～４０１ｄを合成して光沢低減画像４０２を生成し、結果領域１０２に表示する。　 When check box 420 is checked, MCU 30 may temporarily shift to gloss reduction mode. The MCU 30 sets a lighting pattern i on the ring lighting device 12, causes the main camera 11 to photograph the specimen to be inspected, and obtains image data 401a. The MCU 30 sets the lighting pattern ii on the ring illumination device 12, causes the main camera 11 to photograph the specimen to be inspected, and acquires image data 401b. The MCU 30 sets the lighting pattern iii on the ring illumination device 12, causes the main camera 11 to photograph the specimen to be inspected, and acquires image data 401c. The MCU 30 sets a lighting pattern iv on the ring illumination device 12, causes the main camera 11 to photograph the specimen to be inspected, and obtains image data 401d. The MCU 30 synthesizes the image data 401a to 401d to generate a reduced gloss image 402, and displays it in the result area 102.　
光沢低減画像４０２は、ユーザの明示的な指示を待たずに生成されてもよい。この場合の光沢低減画像４０２は、ユーザに対して光沢低減処理の有効化を推奨することになろう。ユーザは、低減処理の効果に納得すれば、チェックボックス４２０をチェックした状態に維持するだろう。一方、ユーザは、低減処理の効果に納得しなければ、チェックボックス４２０からチェックを外すことになるだろう。この場合、ＭＣＵ３０は、リング照明装置１２に全方向照明コマンドを送信し、検査個体に全方向照明を適用し、メインカメラ１１に撮影を実行させ、全方向照明画像を取得し、結果領域１０２に表示する。　 The reduced gloss image 402 may be generated without waiting for explicit instructions from the user. In this case, the gloss reduction image 402 would recommend enabling the gloss reduction process to the user. If the user is satisfied with the effect of the reduction process, he or she will keep the check box 420 checked. On the other hand, if the user is not satisfied with the effect of the reduction process, he or she will likely uncheck the checkbox 420. In this case, the MCU 30 sends an omnidirectional illumination command to the ring illumination device 12 , applies omnidirectional illumination to the test specimen, causes the main camera 11 to take an image, acquires an omnidirectional illumination image, and displays the result area 102 as an omnidirectional illumination image. indicate.　
分類結果領域４３０は、各分類ごとに計数されたコロニーの個数を表示する。分類Ｉは光沢を有するコロニーである。分類ＩＩは黄色のコロニーである。分類ＩＩＩは、その他のコロニーである。ここで示された分類は一例にすぎない。　 The classification result area 430 displays the number of colonies counted for each classification. Class I is a shiny colony. Category II is yellow colonies. Class III is other colonies. The classification shown here is only an example.　
図４８が示すように、ＭＣＵ３０は、全方向照明画像である光沢非低減画像４０３と、光沢低減画像４０２とを結果領域１０２において並べて表示してもよい。これにより、ユーザは、光沢低減処理の効果を簡単に確認することができるであろう。　 As shown in FIG. 48, the MCU 30 may display the non-glossy image 403, which is an omnidirectional illumination image, and the reduced gloss image 402 side by side in the result area 102. This will allow the user to easily confirm the effect of the gloss reduction process.　
［光沢低減処理に関するフローチャート］　図４９は、光沢低減処理を含むコロニーカウント方法を示すフローチャートである。ここでは、各ステップがＭＣＵ３０により実行されるものとして説明されるが、一部またはすべてのステップがＭＣＵ２０により実行されてもよい。　 [Flowchart related to gloss reduction processing] FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a colony counting method including gloss reduction processing. Although each step is described here as being executed by the MCU 30, some or all of the steps may be executed by the MCU 20.　
Ｓ１０１でＭＣＵ３０は、培地の種別の入力を受け付ける。たとえば、ユーザはポインティングデバイス３３を操作してカウント設定ＵＩ４１０におけるメニュー４１１から培地の種別を入力する。培地の種別は、たとえば、フィルム状培地などであってもよい。　 In S101, the MCU 30 receives input of the type of medium. For example, the user operates the pointing device 33 to input the type of culture medium from the menu 411 in the count setting UI 410. The type of medium may be, for example, a film-like medium.　
Ｓ１０２でＭＣＵ３０は、第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａ（第一ハードウエアボタン８ａ）などにより撮影指示が入力されたかどうかを判定する。撮影指示が入力されると、ＭＣＵ３０はＳ１０２からＳ１０３に進む。　 In S102, the MCU 30 determines whether a shooting instruction has been input using the first software button 105a (first hardware button 8a) or the like. When the photographing instruction is input, the MCU 30 proceeds from S102 to S103.　
Ｓ１０３でＭＣＵ３０は、ユーザにより指定または選択された培地の種別に基づき、光沢低減が必要かどうかを判定する。なお、ＭＣＵ３０は、培地の種別を考慮せずに、ユーザによる明示的な指示（例：チェックボックス４２０）の有無に基づき、光沢低減が必要かどうかを判定してもよい。記憶装置３５は、培地の種別と光沢低減の有無とを関連付けた判定テーブルを記憶していてもよい。この場合、ＭＣＵ３０は判定テーブルを参照し、培地の種別に関連付けられている光沢低減の有無（光沢低減モード／光沢非低減モード）を取得する。光沢低減が不要であれば、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ１１０に進み、全方向照明で検査個体の撮影を実行する。ＭＣＵ３０は、ＭＣＵ２０から全方向照明画像４０３を取得し、記憶装置３５に格納する。一方で、光沢低減が必要であれば、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ１０４に進む。　 In S103, the MCU 30 determines whether gloss reduction is necessary based on the type of medium specified or selected by the user. Note that the MCU 30 may determine whether gloss reduction is necessary based on the presence or absence of an explicit instruction by the user (eg, check box 420), without considering the type of medium. The storage device 35 may store a determination table that associates the type of culture medium with the presence or absence of gloss reduction. In this case, the MCU 30 refers to the determination table and obtains the presence or absence of gloss reduction (glossy reduction mode/non-glossy reduction mode) associated with the type of culture medium. If gloss reduction is not necessary, the MCU 30 proceeds to S110 and executes photographing of the test individual using omnidirectional illumination. The MCU 30 acquires the omnidirectional illumination image 403 from the MCU 20 and stores it in the storage device 35. On the other hand, if gloss reduction is necessary, the MCU 30 proceeds to S104.　
Ｓ１０４でＭＣＵ３０は、ヘッド装置１ａに照明コマンドを送信し、リング照明装置１２の照明方向を設定する。たとえば、照明コマンドにより点灯パターンｉ～ｉｖが順番にヘッド装置１ａに設定される。ＭＣＵ２０は、照明コマンドにより指定された点灯パターンでリング照明装置１２を点灯させる。　 In S104, the MCU 30 transmits a lighting command to the head device 1a and sets the lighting direction of the ring lighting device 12. For example, lighting patterns i to iv are sequentially set in the head device 1a by a lighting command. The MCU 20 lights the ring lighting device 12 in a lighting pattern specified by the lighting command.　
Ｓ１０５でＭＣＵ３０は、撮影コマンドをヘッド装置１ａに送信し、指定された照明方向から照明された検査個体について撮影を実行する。ＭＣＵ２０は、撮影コマンドを受信し、撮影コマンドにしたがって検査個体を撮影して画像データを生成し、ＭＣＵ３０へ送信する。ＭＣＵ３０は、ＭＣＵ２０から画像データを取得し、記憶装置３５に格納する。　 In S105, the MCU 30 transmits a photographing command to the head device 1a, and executes photographing of the test individual illuminated from the specified illumination direction. The MCU 20 receives the photographing command, photographs the specimen to be inspected according to the photographing command, generates image data, and transmits the image data to the MCU 30 . The MCU 30 acquires image data from the MCU 20 and stores it in the storage device 35.　
Ｓ１０６でＭＣＵ３０は、撮影数は十分かどうかを判定する。たとえば、四つの画像データ４０１ａから４０１ｄが必要な場合、ＭＣＵ３０は、四つの画像データ４０１ａから４０１ｄがすべて取得されたかどうかを判定する。撮影数が十分でなければ、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ１０４に戻り、ヘッド装置１ａに次の照明方向を設定する。これにより、照明方向が変更される。一方で、撮影数が十分であれば、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ１０７に進む。　 In S106, the MCU 30 determines whether the number of shots is sufficient. For example, if four image data 401a to 401d are required, the MCU 30 determines whether all four image data 401a to 401d have been acquired. If the number of shots is not sufficient, the MCU 30 returns to S104 and sets the next illumination direction on the head device 1a. This changes the illumination direction. On the other hand, if the number of shots is sufficient, the MCU 30 proceeds to S107.　
Ｓ１０７でＭＣＵ３０は、記憶装置３５から画像データ４０１ａないし４０１ｄを読み出して合成し、光沢低減画像４０２を生成する。　 In S107, the MCU 30 reads the image data 401a to 401d from the storage device 35 and combines them to generate the reduced gloss image 402.　
Ｓ１０８でＭＣＵ３０は、検査画像（光沢低減画像４０２または全方向照明画像４０３）からコロニーをカウントする。　 In S108, the MCU 30 counts colonies from the inspection image (the reduced gloss image 402 or the omnidirectional illumination image 403).　
図５０は、コロニーの分類方法を示すフローチャートである。ここでは、各ステップがＭＣＵ３０により実行されるものとして説明されるが、一部またはすべてのステップがＭＣＵ２０により実行されてもよい。　 FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a colony classification method. Although each step is described here as being executed by the MCU 30, some or all of the steps may be executed by the MCU 20.　
Ｓ１１１でＭＣＵ３０は、全方向照明（標準照明）
で検査個体の撮影を実行する。たとえば、ＭＣＵ３０は、全方向照明コマンドをヘッド装置１ａに送信するとともに、撮影コマンドをヘッド装置１ａに送信する。ＭＣＵ２０は、全方向照明コマンドを受信すると、リング照明装置１２に含まれる３２個の発光素子１２ａを同時に点灯し、すべての照明方向から照明光を検査個体に照射する。また、ＭＣＵ２０は、撮影コマンドを受信すると、メインカメラ１１に検査個体を撮影させて画像データを生成し、画像データ（全方向照明画像４０３）をＭＣＵ３０へ送信する。これにより全方向照明画像４０３が取得される。なお、それぞれ照明方向が異なる複数の画像データ４０１ａないし４０１ｄから擬似的に全方向照明画像４０３が生成される場合、Ｓ１１１は省略される。　 In S111, MCU30 has omnidirectional illumination (standard illumination)
Execute photographing of the test specimen. For example, the MCU 30 transmits an omnidirectional illumination command to the head device 1a, and also transmits a photographing command to the head device 1a. When the MCU 20 receives the omnidirectional illumination command, it simultaneously lights up the 32 light emitting elements 12a included in the ring illumination device 12, and irradiates the test object with illumination light from all illumination directions. Further, upon receiving the photographing command, the MCU 20 causes the main camera 11 to photograph the specimen to be inspected, generates image data, and transmits the image data (omnidirectional illumination image 403) to the MCU 30. As a result, an omnidirectional illumination image 403 is obtained. Note that when the omnidirectional illumination image 403 is generated in a pseudo manner from a plurality of image data 401a to 401d each having a different illumination direction, S111 is omitted.
Ｓ１１２でＭＣＵ３０は、光沢低減画像４０２の撮影を実行する。たとえば、ＭＣＵ３０は、図４９に示されたＳ１０４からＳ１０７を実行する。　 In S112, the MCU 30 executes shooting of the reduced gloss image 402. For example, the MCU 30 executes S104 to S107 shown in FIG. 49.　
Ｓ１１３でＭＣＵ３０は、光沢低減画像４０２でコロニーをカウントする。これにより、コロニーを形成している画素群（領域）が特定される。ＭＣＵ３０は、記憶装置３５に、コロニーの位置を示す位置情報（どの画素がコロニーであるかを示す情報）を格納する。　 In S113, the MCU 30 counts colonies in the reduced gloss image 402. As a result, the pixel group (region) forming the colony is specified. The MCU 30 stores position information indicating the position of a colony (information indicating which pixel is a colony) in the storage device 35.　
Ｓ１１４でＭＣＵ３０は、記憶装置３５に記憶されているコロニー領域の位置情報を参照し、一つのコロニー領域を選択する。　 In S114, the MCU 30 refers to the position information of the colony areas stored in the storage device 35 and selects one colony area.　
Ｓ１１５（オプション）でＭＣＵ３０は、全方向照明画像４０３でコロニー領域のヒストグラムを作成する。たとえば、ＭＣＵ３０は、選択されたコロニー領域を構成している複数の画素の座標を記憶装置３５から読み出し、読み出された座標に対応する画素の画素値を全方向照明画像４０３から取得する。全方向照明画像４０３は、光沢低減処理を適用されていない。そのため、注目画素が光沢画素であれば、注目画素は高輝度の画素である。ＭＣＵ３０は、全方向照明画像４０３において、複数の画素の画素値に基づき光沢のヒストグラムを作成してもよい。　 In S115 (optional), the MCU 30 creates a histogram of the colony area using the omnidirectional illumination image 403. For example, the MCU 30 reads the coordinates of a plurality of pixels constituting the selected colony area from the storage device 35, and acquires the pixel value of the pixel corresponding to the read coordinates from the omnidirectional illumination image 403. Omnidirectional illumination image 403 has no gloss reduction processing applied to it. Therefore, if the pixel of interest is a glossy pixel, the pixel of interest is a high-luminance pixel. The MCU 30 may create a gloss histogram based on the pixel values of a plurality of pixels in the omnidirectional illumination image 403.　
Ｓ１１６でＭＣＵ３０は、コロニー領域内で光沢領域が占める割合（比率）を求める。たとえば、ＭＣＵ３０は、コロニー領域に含まれる画素の総数で、光沢領域に含まれる画素の総数を除算することで、比率を演算してもよい。　 In S116, the MCU 30 determines the proportion (ratio) occupied by the glossy area within the colony area. For example, the MCU 30 may calculate the ratio by dividing the total number of pixels included in the glossy area by the total number of pixels included in the colony area.　
Ｓ１１７でＭＣＵ３０は、コロニー領域内で光沢領域が占める割合が所定の閾値を超えているかどうかを判定する。割合が所定の閾値を超えていれば、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ１１８に進み、コロニー領域を光沢コロニーに分類する。一方で、割合が所定の閾値以下であれば、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ１２０に進み、コロニー領域を非光沢コロニーに分類する。　 In S117, the MCU 30 determines whether the proportion of the glossy area within the colony area exceeds a predetermined threshold. If the ratio exceeds the predetermined threshold, the MCU 30 proceeds to S118 and classifies the colony area as a glossy colony. On the other hand, if the ratio is below the predetermined threshold, the MCU 30 proceeds to S120 and classifies the colony area as a non-glossy colony.　
Ｓ１１９でＭＣＵ３０は、すべてのコロニー領域の分類が完了したかどうかを判定する。分類されていないコロニー領域が残っている場合、ＭＣＵ３０は、Ｓ１１４に戻り、次のコロニー領域を選択する。これにより、次のコロニー領域について分類が実行される。一方で、すべてのコロニー領域が分類されていれば、ＭＣＵ３０は、コロニーの分類方法を終了する。　 In S119, the MCU 30 determines whether classification of all colony areas has been completed. If unclassified colony areas remain, the MCU 30 returns to S114 and selects the next colony area. As a result, classification is performed for the next colony area. On the other hand, if all colony areas have been classified, the MCU 30 ends the colony classification method.　
図４７が示すように、ＭＣＵ３０は、各分類の種類または名称と、各分類ごとのコロニーの個数とを分類結果領域４３０に表示してもよい。これにより、ユーザは、分類ごとのカウント数を容易に確認することができるようになろう。　 As shown in FIG. 47, the MCU 30 may display the type or name of each classification and the number of colonies for each classification in the classification result area 430. With this, the user will be able to easily check the count number for each category.　
＜まとめ＞　［観点Ａ１］　記憶装置３５は、複数の検査個体の各々のカウント結果が入力されるセルを含むカウント表を記憶する記憶部の一例である。ＭＣＵ３０および表示制御部３６は、記憶部に記憶されているカウント表を表示装置３７に表示する表示制御部の一例である。ＭＣＵ３０およびポインティングデバイス３３などは、表示制御部により表示されるカウント表に含まれる複数のセルの中から、カウント結果が入力される対象セルを特定するセル特定部の一例である。ＭＣＵ２０またはＭＣＵ３０は、ユーザの操作にしたがった計数指示を生成する計数指示部の一例である。ＭＣＵ３０およびメインカメラ１１は、計数指示部で生成された計数指示に基づいて検査個体の画像である検査画像を取得する取得部の一例である。ＭＣＵ２０またはＭＣＵ３０は、取得部で取得された検査画像に基づき検査個体に含まれるコロニーを計数する計数部の一例である。図１９や図２０などが例示するように、ＭＣＵ２０またはＭＣＵ３０は、計数部により計数されたコロニーの数を対象セルに反映する表管理部として機能する。これにより、コロニーの計数結果についての事後処理に関するユーザの負担が軽減される。　 <Summary> [Aspect A1] The storage device 35 is an example of a storage unit that stores a count table including cells into which the count results of each of a plurality of test individuals are input. The MCU 30 and the display control unit 36 are examples of a display control unit that displays the count table stored in the storage unit on the display device 37. The MCU 30, the pointing device 33, and the like are examples of a cell specifying section that specifies a target cell into which a count result is input from among a plurality of cells included in the count table displayed by the display control section. MCU20 or MCU30 is an example of a counting instruction unit that generates counting instructions according to user operations. The MCU 30 and the main camera 11 are an example of an acquisition unit that acquires an inspection image, which is an image of an individual to be inspected, based on the counting instruction generated by the counting instruction unit. The MCU 20 or MCU 30 is an example of a counting unit that counts colonies included in the test individual based on the test image acquired by the acquisition unit. As illustrated in FIGS. 19 and 20, the MCU 20 or 30 functions as a table management unit that reflects the number of colonies counted by the counting unit in the target cell. This reduces the burden on the user regarding post-processing of colony counting results.　
［観点Ａ２］　表管理部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、ユーザ操作に応じて検査個体の識別情報を格納する識別情報セルと、識別情報セルと関連付けられ、検査個体についてのコロニーの数のカウント結果を格納するカウント結果セルと、を含むカウント表を作成し、記憶部に当該カウント表を記憶させてもよい。つまり、図５や図１６などが示すように、カウント表５５、８２は、検査個体の識別情報（例：サンプル名）を格納する識別情報セルと、識別情報セルと関連付けられ、検査個体についてのコロニーの数のカウント結果を格納するカウント結果セルと、を含んでもよい。これにより、ユーザは、カウント表を手書きで作成する手間を省くことができるであろう。　 [Viewpoint A2] The table management unit (e.g. MCU 30) is associated with an identification information cell that stores identification information of a test individual according to a user operation, and a count result of the number of colonies for the test individual. A count table including count result cells to be stored may be created and the count table may be stored in the storage unit. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 16, the count tables 55 and 82 are associated with identification information cells that store identification information (e.g. sample name) of the tested individual, and with the identification information cells, A count result cell storing a count result of the number of colonies may be included. This will save the user the trouble of creating a count table by hand.　
［観点Ａ３］　表管理部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、コロニーの数のカウント結果を格納するカウント結果セルに対して検査条件を関連付けてもよい。これにより、カウント結果が格納されるセルに対して検査条件を関連付けておくことで、コロニーに関する検査を事項する際に検査条件を容易に設定することが可能となる。　 [Aspect A3] The table management unit (eg, MCU 30) may associate test conditions with count result cells that store the count results of the number of colonies. By associating test conditions with cells in which count results are stored, test conditions can be easily set when testing colonies.　
［観点Ａ４］　取得部は、検査個体を照明する照明部（例：リング照明装置１２、１３、同軸照明装置１４）と、照明部により照明された検査個体を撮像する撮像部（例：メインカメラ１１）と、を有してもよい。検査条件は、照明部の照明条件（例：照明の種類、明るさ）を含んでもよい。大腸菌、一般生菌などの菌の種別や培地の種別（例：シート型の培地、液体型の培地、選択型の培地）に応じて適切な照明条件は異なる。よって、検査条件として照明条件を含めることで、各セルに適した照明条件が設定可能となる。さらに、検査条件は、撮像部の撮像条件（例：露光時間）を含んでもよい。培地の色やコロニーの色によって適切な撮像条件は異なりうる。検査条件が撮像条件を含むことで、各セルごとに適切な撮像条件が設定可能となろう。　 [Viewpoint A4] The acquisition unit includes an illumination unit that illuminates the inspection object (e.g. ring illumination devices 12, 13, coaxial illumination device 14), and an imaging unit that images the inspection object illuminated by the illumination unit (e.g. main camera). 11). The inspection conditions may include lighting conditions of the lighting section (eg, type of lighting, brightness). Appropriate lighting conditions differ depending on the type of bacteria, such as Escherichia coli or general viable bacteria, and the type of medium (e.g., sheet type medium, liquid type medium, selective type medium). Therefore, by including illumination conditions as inspection conditions, illumination conditions suitable for each cell can be set. Furthermore, the inspection conditions may include imaging conditions (eg, exposure time) of the imaging unit. Appropriate imaging conditions may vary depending on the color of the medium and the color of the colony. By including the imaging conditions in the inspection conditions, it will be possible to set appropriate imaging conditions for each cell.　
［観点Ａ５］　照明部は、検査個体を落射照明する第一照明モード（例：リング照明装置１２を点灯するモード）と、撮像部に対して対向する方向から検査個体を透過照明する第二照明モード（例：同軸照明装置１４を点灯するモード）とのいずれかにしたがって動作してもよい。検査条件は、第一照明モードまたは第二照明モードの選択を含む。検査条件が照明モードの指定を含むことで、各セルごとに適切な照明モードを選択することが可能となろう。　 [Viewpoint A5] The illumination unit has a first illumination mode that epi-illuminates the inspected individual (e.g. a mode that lights up the ring illumination device 12), and a second illumination mode that transmits and illuminates the inspected individual from the direction opposite to the imaging unit. mode (eg, a mode in which the coaxial lighting device 14 is turned on). The inspection conditions include selection of the first illumination mode or the second illumination mode. If the inspection conditions include the designation of the illumination mode, it will be possible to select an appropriate illumination mode for each cell.　
［観点Ａ６］　検査条件は、計数部に適用される計数条件を含んでもよい。ここで、計数条件は、コロニーを検出するための閾値、および、コロニーを検出する際の基準となる色の少なくとも一方を含みうる。たとえば、計数条件は、コロニーとそれ以外とを区別するための閾値（例：検出感度を左右する二値化閾値）、および、コロニーを計数する際の基準となる色（例：前景色、背景色）を含んでもよい。ＭＣＵ２０またはＭＣＵ３０は、検査画像を二値化してコロニーの個数をカウントしてもよい。よって、二値化閾値はコロニーの検出感度を左右する。二値化閾値を適切に設定することで、コロニーの誤検出が減少する。また、コロニーの色と培地の色とを適切に設定することが出来れば、コロニーの誤検出が減少する。各セルごとに計数条件を設定することで、各セルごとにコロニーの誤検出が減少するであろう。また、計数条件に応じて計数アルゴリズムを適切に調整することが可能となろう。　 [Aspect A6] The inspection conditions may include counting conditions applied to the counting section. Here, the counting conditions may include at least one of a threshold value for detecting colonies and a color serving as a reference when detecting colonies. For example, the counting conditions include a threshold value for distinguishing between colonies and others (e.g., a binarization threshold that affects detection sensitivity), and a color (e.g., foreground color, background color) that is the standard for counting colonies. color). MCU20 or MCU30 may binarize the inspection image and count the number of colonies. Therefore, the binarization threshold affects the colony detection sensitivity. By appropriately setting the binarization threshold, false detection of colonies is reduced. Furthermore, if the color of the colony and the color of the medium can be appropriately set, false detection of colonies will be reduced. Setting counting conditions for each cell will reduce false detection of colonies for each cell. Furthermore, it will be possible to appropriately adjust the counting algorithm depending on the counting conditions.　
［観点Ａ７］　計数部（例：ＭＣＵ２０、ＭＣＵ３０）は、ユーザにより計数指示が入力されると、対象セルに関連付けられている検査条件にしたがった照明コマンドを照明部に出力してもよい。照明部は、照明コマンドにしたがって検査個体を照明する。撮像部は、照明コマンドにしたがって照明部により照明された検査個体を撮像して検査画像を生成する。計数部は、照明コマンドが反映された検査画像に基づきコロニーの数を計数する。これにより、各セルごとに設定された検査条件が反映された検査画像についてコロニー数を計数することが可能となる。　 [Aspect A7] When a counting instruction is input by the user, the counting unit (eg, MCU 20, MCU 30) may output an illumination command according to the inspection condition associated with the target cell to the illumination unit. The illumination unit illuminates the inspection object according to the illumination command. The imaging unit generates an inspection image by capturing an image of the inspection object illuminated by the illumination unit according to the illumination command. The counting unit counts the number of colonies based on the inspection image in which the illumination command is reflected. This makes it possible to count the number of colonies in an inspection image that reflects the inspection conditions set for each cell.　
［観点Ａ８］　計数部（例：ＭＣＵ２０、ＭＣＵ３０）は、特定部により対象セルが第一セルから第二セルに変更されると、取得部に適用される検査条件を、第一セルに関連付けられている第一検査条件から、第二セルに関連付けられている第二検査条件に変更する。このように、対象セルが変更されるとそれに連動して検査条件を変更することが可能となる。各セルごとに、つまり、検査個体ごとに適切な検査条件はことなることがある。予めセルごとに適切な検査条件が設定されていれば、ユーザはセルを選択するだけで適切な検査条件を選択することが可能となろう。　 [Viewpoint A8] When the target cell is changed from the first cell to the second cell by the specific unit, the counting unit (e.g. MCU20, MCU30) changes the inspection condition applied to the acquisition unit to be associated with the first cell. The first test condition associated with the second cell is changed to the second test condition associated with the second cell. In this way, when the target cell is changed, the inspection conditions can be changed in conjunction with the change. Appropriate test conditions may vary for each cell, that is, for each individual to be tested. If appropriate inspection conditions are set for each cell in advance, the user will be able to select appropriate inspection conditions simply by selecting a cell.　
［観点Ａ９］　サンプルＤＢ４０は、カウント表５５，８２の作成を補助するためのデータベースである。ＭＣＵ３０は、データベースにデータを登録する登録部として機能してもよい。カウント表５５、８２は、識別情報セルとカウント結果セルとをそれぞれ含む複数の行要素を有してもよい。登録部（ＭＣＵ３０）は、カウント結果がカウント結果セルに入力されたカウント表８２に含まれる行要素をデータベースに登録するように構成されてもよい。ここで、行要素は、セルと当該セルに関連付けられた検査条件とを含む。表管理部（ＭＣＵ３０）は、データベースに保持されている複数の行要素のうちユーザにより指定された行要素に基づき新規のカウント表を作成してもよい。たとえば、ユーザにより指定された行要素を構成するセルと当該セルに関連付けられている検査条件とが新規のカウント表へコピーされる。また、セルに格納されていたカウント結果は、サンプルＤＢ４０に登録される際に削除されてもよい。このように、予めカウント表の行要素として採用可能な行要素をデータベース化しておくことで、ユーザは、新規のカウント表を容易に作成することができる。　 [Viewpoint A9] The sample DB 40 is a database for assisting the creation of the count tables 55 and 82. The MCU 30 may function as a registration unit that registers data in a database. The count tables 55 and 82 may have a plurality of row elements each including an identification information cell and a count result cell. The registration unit (MCU 30) may be configured to register row elements included in the count table 82 whose count results are input into count result cells in the database. Here, the row element includes a cell and a test condition associated with the cell. The table management unit (MCU 30) may create a new count table based on a row element specified by the user among a plurality of row elements held in the database. For example, cells constituting a row element specified by the user and inspection conditions associated with the cells are copied to a new count table. Further, the count result stored in the cell may be deleted when being registered in the sample DB 40. In this way, by creating a database of row elements that can be adopted as row elements of a count table in advance, the user can easily create a new count table.　
［観点Ａ１０］　カウント表５５、８２は、複数の列要素を有してもよい。複数の列要素は、それぞれ組み合わせに関連付けられていてもよい。ここで、組み合わせとは、検査個体の培養条件（例：希釈倍率、培養時間）と菌種（例：一般生菌、大腸菌）との組み合わせである。各列要素は、培養条件と菌種との組み合わせが異なっている。たとえば、第一列要素と第二列要素とでは、培養条件と菌種とのうち少なくとも一方が異なっている。これにより、ある検査個体について、様々な培養条件と様々な菌種とから構成される複数の組み合わせそれぞれ対応するセルを一行にまとめることも可能となろう。　 [Viewpoint A10] The count tables 55 and 82 may have multiple column elements. Each of the plurality of column elements may be associated with a combination. Here, the combination is a combination of the culture conditions (eg, dilution ratio, culture time) of the test individual and the bacterial species (eg, common viable bacteria, Escherichia coli). Each column element has a different combination of culture conditions and bacterial species. For example, the first row element and the second row element are different in at least one of culture conditions and bacterial species. This would make it possible to group cells corresponding to a plurality of combinations of various culture conditions and various bacterial species into one row for a certain test individual.　
［観点Ａ１１］　表管理部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、データベースに保持されている複数の行要素のうちユーザにより指定された行要素（指定行要素）が、新規のカウント表に含まれているか否かを判定してもよい。指定行要素がカウント表に含まれていないと判定された場合、ＭＣＵ３０は、指定行要素が、カウント表に含まれていない新規の列要素のセルを含むか否かを判定してもよい。指定行要素が新規の列要素のセルを含むと判定された場合、ＭＣＵ３０は、当該新規の列要素を新規のカウント表に追加する。一方、指定行要素がカウント表にすでに含まれているか、または、指定行要素が新規の列要素のセルを含まない場合、当該列要素はカウント表に追加されない。これにより、テーブル表における行要素の重複と列要素の重複が抑制され、テーブル表のコンパクト化が実現されよう。　 [Viewpoint A11] The table management unit (e.g. MCU 30) determines whether the row element specified by the user (designated row element) among the multiple row elements held in the database is included in the new count table. It may be determined whether If it is determined that the designated row element is not included in the count table, the MCU 30 may determine whether the designated row element includes a cell of a new column element that is not included in the count table. If it is determined that the designated row element includes a cell of a new column element, the MCU 30 adds the new column element to a new count table. On the other hand, if the specified row element is already included in the count table, or if the specified row element does not include a cell of a new column element, the column element is not added to the count table. As a result, duplication of row elements and duplication of column elements in the table will be suppressed, and the table will be made more compact.　
［観点Ａ１２、１３］　データベースは、親子関係を定義された複数の行要素を含んでもよい。親子関係は、完成品を親とし、当該完成品を構成する具材を子とする関係であ
ってもよい。商品全体（完成品）の培養結果におけるコロニーのカウントと、商品を構成する個別の具材の培養結果におけるコロニーのカウントとが必要なケースがある。よって、親子関係をあらかじめ定義しておくことで、カウント表を作成する際のユーザ工数が削減される。たとえば、ある完成品（例：サンドイッチ）が選択されたときに、その具材（例：ハム、レタス）が選択可能に提示されてもよい。　 [Aspects A12, 13] The database may include a plurality of row elements in which a parent-child relationship is defined. The parent-child relationship may be such that the finished product is the parent and the ingredients constituting the finished product are the children. There are cases where it is necessary to count colonies in the culture results of the entire product (finished product) and to count colonies in the culture results of individual ingredients that make up the product. Therefore, by defining the parent-child relationship in advance, the user's man-hours when creating a count table can be reduced. For example, when a certain finished product (eg, sandwich) is selected, its ingredients (eg, ham, lettuce) may be presented for selection.
［観点Ａ１４］　表管理部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、親子関係を定義された複数の行要素を一括して新規のカウント表に追加してもよい。これにより、カウント表を作成する際のユーザの負担がさらに軽減されるであろう。　 [Aspect A14] The table management unit (eg, MCU 30) may add a plurality of row elements with defined parent-child relationships to a new count table all at once. This will further reduce the burden on the user when creating the count table.　
［観点Ａ１５］　表管理部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、統計処理の適用が指示されると、同一の検査個体をそれぞれ培養するｎ個の培養器の各カウント結果を格納するｎ個の行要素と、当該ｎ個の行要素の統計処理結果を格納する少なくとも１個の行要素と、を含むようにカウント表を作成してもよい。図１１によれば、ｎ＝２の事例が説明されている。ｎは３以上であってもよい。これにより、平均化等の統計処理を実行するカウント表の作成が容易になろう。　 [Viewpoint A15] When the table management unit (e.g. MCU 30) is instructed to apply statistical processing, it creates n row elements that store the count results of n incubators each cultivating the same test individual. , and at least one row element that stores the statistical processing results of the n row elements. According to FIG. 11, the case of n=2 is illustrated. n may be 3 or more. This will make it easier to create a count table for performing statistical processing such as averaging.　
［観点Ａ１６］　図１６などが例示するように、表示制御部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、表示装置３７に、検査画像とカウント表とを並べて（同時並行的に）表示させてもよい。セル特定部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、表示装置３７に検査画像とともに表示されるカウント表に含まれる複数のセルの中から、ユーザの選択にしたがって対象セルを特定してもよい。表示制御部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、計数部により計数されたコロニーの数が対象セルに反映されたカウント表を、検査画像とともに表示装置に表示させてもよい。これにより、カウント結果を格納されるセルが容易に選択可能となろう。　 [Viewpoint A16] As illustrated in FIG. 16 and the like, the display control unit (eg, MCU 30) may display the inspection image and the count table side by side (simultaneously in parallel) on the display device 37. The cell specifying unit (eg, MCU 30) may specify a target cell from among a plurality of cells included in the count table displayed together with the inspection image on the display device 37 according to the user's selection. The display control unit (eg, MCU 30) may cause the display device to display a count table in which the number of colonies counted by the counting unit is reflected in the target cell together with the inspection image. This will make it easier to select the cell in which the count result is stored.　
［観点Ａ１７］　図２５が例示するように、表示制御部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、対象セルに関連付けられる検査条件に含まれる照明条件を設定するための第一コントロールオブジェクト（例：タブ１２３）と、当該検査条件に含まれる計数条件を設定するための第二コントロールオブジェクト（例：タブ１２４）と、を表示装置３７に表示してもよい。これにより、セルに関連付けられている検査条件を容易に変更することが可能となろう。さらに、表示制御部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、第一コントロールオブジェクト（例：タブ１２３）に対するユーザ操作を検知すると、照明条件を設定するための設定画面（例：確認画面１１０）を表示装置に表示してもよい。表示制御部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、第二コントロールオブジェクト（例：タブ１２４）に対するユーザ操作を検知すると、計数条件を設定するための設定画面（例：設定画面１２０）を表示装置に表示してもよい。　 [Viewpoint A17] As illustrated in FIG. 25, the display control unit (e.g. MCU 30) has a first control object (e.g. tab 123) for setting the illumination conditions included in the inspection conditions associated with the target cell. , and a second control object (eg, tab 124) for setting counting conditions included in the inspection conditions may be displayed on the display device 37. This would make it possible to easily change the test conditions associated with a cell. Furthermore, when the display control unit (e.g., MCU 30) detects a user operation on the first control object (e.g., tab 123), the display control unit (e.g., MCU 30) displays a setting screen (e.g., confirmation screen 110) for setting lighting conditions on the display device. You may. When the display control unit (e.g., MCU 30) detects a user operation on the second control object (e.g., tab 124), the display control unit (e.g., MCU 30) displays a setting screen (e.g., setting screen 120) for setting counting conditions on the display device. Good too.　
［観点Ａ１８］　表示制御部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、計数部に計数を指示するための第三コントロールオブジェクト（例：第一ソフトウエアボタン１０５ａ）と、カウント結果を対象セルに登録することを指示するための第四コントロールオブジェクト（例：第二ソフトウエアボタン１０５ｂ）と、を表示装置３７に表示してもよい。これによりユーザは容易にカウントの指示とカウント結果の登録とを指示することが可能となろう。　 [Viewpoint A18] The display control unit (e.g. MCU 30) provides a third control object (e.g. first software button 105a) for instructing the counting unit to count and for instructing to register the count result in the target cell. A fourth control object (e.g., second software button 105b) for doing so may be displayed on the display device 37. This will enable the user to easily instruct counting and registration of count results.　
［観点Ａ１９］　表示制御部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、第三コントロールオブジェクトに対するユーザ操作を検知すると、当該第三コントロールオブジェクトを、計数を指示するためのコントロールオブジェクト（例：カウントボタン）から、取得部に検査画像の取得を指示するためのコントロールオブジェクト（例：撮影ボタン、撮りなおしボタン）に割り当ててもよい。つまり、ＭＣＵ３０は、第三コントロールオブジェクトを操作することで発行されるコマンドを、計数を指示するためのコマンドから、検査画像の取得を指示するためのコマンドに変更してもよい。これにより、操作可能なボタンの数が削減され、ユーザは、今、何を操作すべきかを容易に判断できるであろう。　 [Viewpoint A19] When the display control unit (e.g. MCU 30) detects a user operation on the third control object, the display control unit (e.g. MCU 30) converts the third control object from the control object (e.g. count button) for instructing counting to the acquisition unit. It may be assigned to a control object (eg, a shooting button, a reshooting button) for instructing the acquisition of an inspection image. That is, the MCU 30 may change the command issued by operating the third control object from a command for instructing counting to a command for instructing acquisition of a test image. This reduces the number of operable buttons, allowing the user to easily determine what to operate now.　
［観点Ａ２０］　図１８が例示するように、表示制御部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、第三コントロールオブジェクトが計数を指示するためのコントロールオブジェクト（例：カウントボタン）に割り当てられているときは、ユーザ操作を受け付けないように第四コントロールオブジェクト（例：登録ボタン）を表示してもよい。図１９が例示すように、計数を指示するためのコントロールオブジェクトに割り当てられている第三コントロールオブジェクトが操作されると、計数結果が取得される。表示制御部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、計数結果が取得されると、第三コントロールオブジェクトが取得部に検査画像の取得を指示するためのコントロールオブジェクト（例：撮影ボタン）に割り当てられ、かつ、ユーザ操作を受け付けるように第四コントロールオブジェクト（例：登録ボタン）を変更してもよい。つまり、第三コントロールオブジェクトに対して計数を指示するためのコマンドが割り当てられているときは、ユーザ操作を受け付けないように第四コントロールオブジェクトが表示されてもよい。さらに、計数を指示するためのコマンドが割り当てられている第三コントロールオブジェクトが操作されて、カウント結果が取得されると、第三コントロールオブジェクトに対して、取得部に検査画像の取得を指示するためのコマンドが割り当てられ、かつ、ユーザ操作を受け付けるように、第四コントロールオブジェクトの表示が変更されてもよい。これにより、ユーザは、今、何を操作すべきかを容易に判断できるであろう。　 [Viewpoint A20] As illustrated in FIG. 18, when the third control object is assigned to a control object (e.g. count button) for instructing counting, the display control unit (e.g. MCU 30) A fourth control object (eg, registration button) may be displayed so as not to accept operations. As illustrated in FIG. 19, when the third control object assigned to the control object for instructing counting is operated, a counting result is obtained. The display control unit (e.g., MCU 30) assigns a third control object to a control object (e.g., shooting button) for instructing the acquisition unit to acquire an inspection image when the counting result is acquired, and The fourth control object (eg, registration button) may be changed to accept an operation. That is, when a command for instructing counting is assigned to the third control object, the fourth control object may be displayed so as not to accept user operations. Furthermore, when the third control object to which a command for instructing counting is assigned is operated and the count result is obtained, the third control object is configured to instruct the obtaining unit to obtain the inspection image. The display of the fourth control object may be changed so that the command is assigned to the fourth control object and accepts a user operation. This will allow the user to easily determine what to operate now.　
［観点Ａ２１］　図１９，図２０などが例示するように、表示制御部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、第四コントロールオブジェクト（例：登録ボタン）が操作されると、カウント結果を対象セルに登録し、ユーザ操作を受け付けないように第四コントロールオブジェクトを再び変更してもよい。ここで、セル特定部は、対象セルを次のセルに変更する。図２０および図１８が例示するように、表示制御部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、取得部に検査画像の取得を指示するためのコマンドが割り当てられた第三コントロールオブジェクト（例：撮影ボタン）が操作されると、取得部に検査画像を取得させ、計数を指示するためのコマンドが第三コントロールオブジェクト（例：カウントボタン）に割り当てられてもよい。これにより、ユーザは、今、何を操作すべきかを容易に判断できるであろう。　 [Viewpoint A21] As illustrated in FIGS. 19 and 20, the display control unit (e.g. MCU 30) registers the count result in the target cell when the fourth control object (e.g. registration button) is operated. , the fourth control object may be changed again so as not to accept user operations. Here, the cell specifying unit changes the target cell to the next cell. As illustrated in FIGS. 20 and 18, the display control unit (e.g. MCU 30) is operated by a third control object (e.g. shooting button) to which a command for instructing the acquisition unit to acquire an inspection image is assigned. Then, a command for causing the acquisition unit to acquire the inspection image and instructing counting may be assigned to a third control object (eg, a count button). This will allow the user to easily determine what to operate now.　
［観点Ａ２２］　ヘッド装置１は、たとえば、コロニー計数装置の筐体に設けられた第一ハードウエアボタンおよび第二ハードウエアボタンをさらに有してもよい。第一ハードウエアボタンと第三コントロールオブジェクトには同一の機能が割り当てられ、第二ハードウエアボタンと第四コントロールオブジェクトには同一の機能が割り当てられてもよい。これにより、ハードウエアボタンとソフトウエアボタンとを連携させることが可能となろう。ユーザが、ヘッド装置１にセットされたシャーレ１５に注視している場合、ヘッド装置１のハードウエアボタンにより指示を入力することが可能となる。つまり、ユーザは、ＰＣ１ｂの表示装置３７に視線を移し、かつ、ポインティングデバイス３３を操作することなく、簡単に指示を入力できるようになろう。その一方で、ユーザが、ＰＣ１ｂに表示された検査画像に注視している場合、ハードウエアボタンに視線を移し、それを押すことは、作業効率を低下させるだろう。よって、この場合、表示装置３７にソフトウエアボタンを表示することで、ユーザは簡単かつ正確にボタンを操作できるようになろう。　 [Aspect A22] The head device 1 may further include, for example, a first hardware button and a second hardware button provided on the housing of the colony counting device. The same function may be assigned to the first hardware button and the third control object, and the same function may be assigned to the second hardware button and the fourth control object. This would allow hardware buttons and software buttons to work together. When the user is gazing at the petri dish 15 set in the head device 1, it becomes possible to input instructions using the hardware buttons of the head device 1. In other words, the user will be able to easily input instructions without looking at the display device 37 of the PC 1b and without operating the pointing device 33. On the other hand, when the user is gazing at the inspection image displayed on the PC 1b, shifting his/her gaze to a hardware button and pressing it will reduce work efficiency. Therefore, in this case, by displaying the software buttons on the display device 37, the user will be able to easily and accurately operate the buttons.　
［観点Ａ２３］　アプリケーションプログラム３９は、コロニー計数装置を制御する制御装置において実行されるプログラムの一例である。アプリケーションプログラム３９は、ＰＣ１ｂに、　複数の検査個体の各々のカウント結果が入力されるセルを含むカウント表を記憶部に記憶させ、　記憶部に記憶されているカウント表を表示装置に表示させ、　表示装置に表示されるカウント表に含まれる複数のセルの中から、カウント結果が入力される対象セルを特定させ、　検査個体の画像である検査画像を取得させ、　ユーザにより入力される計数指示にしたがって、取得部で取得された検査画像に基づき検査個体に含まれるコロニーの数を取得させ、　コロニーの数を対象セルに反映させる。　 [Viewpoint A23] The application program 39 is an example of a program executed in a control device that controls the colony counting device. The application program 39 causes the PC 1b to store a count table including cells into which the count results of each of the plurality of test individuals are input in the storage unit, displays the count table stored in the storage unit on the display device, and displays From among the multiple cells included in the count table displayed on the device, identify the target cell into which the count results will be input, obtain the test image that is the image of the test individual, and follow the counting instructions input by the user. , the number of colonies included in the test individual is acquired based on the test image acquired by the acquisition unit, and the number of colonies is reflected in the target cell.　
［観点Ａ２４］　上記の実施例によれば、コロニー計数装置１を制御する制御方法が提供される。当該制御方法は、　複数の検査個体の各々のカウント結果が入力されるセルを含むカウント表を記憶部に記憶させることと、　記憶部に記憶されているカウント表を表示装置に表示することと、　表示装置に表示されるカウント表に含まれる複数のセルの中から、カウント結果が入力される対象セルを特定することと、　検査個体の画像である検査画像を取得することと、　ユーザにより入力される計数指示にしたがって、取得部で取得された検査画像に基づき検査個体に含まれるコロニーを計数することと、　計数されたコロニーの数を対象セルに反映させることと、を有する。　 [Aspect A24] According to the above embodiment, a control method for controlling the colony counting device 1 is provided. The control method includes: storing in a storage unit a count table including cells into which the count results of each of a plurality of test individuals are input; displaying the count table stored in the storage unit on a display device; Among the multiple cells included in the count table displayed on the display device, the target cell into which the count result will be input is identified, the test image that is the image of the test individual is obtained, and the data input by the user is counting the colonies included in the test individual based on the test image acquired by the acquisition unit according to the counting instructions provided by the acquisition unit; and reflecting the counted number of colonies in the target cell.　
［観点Ｂ１］　記憶装置３５は、検査個体についてのコロニーのカウント結果が入力されるセルを含むカウント表と、当該カウント表に関連付けられた識別情報と、を記憶する記憶部として機能する。ＭＣＵ３０およびＭＣＵ２０は、識別情報を符号化した識別画像（例：一次元シンボル、二次元シンボル）から当該識別情報を取得する識別情報取得部として機能する。ＭＣＵ３０は、取得部により取得された識別情報に関連付けられているカウント表を記憶部から読み出す表管理部として機能する。さらに、ＭＣＵ３０は、表管理部で読み出されたカウント表に含まれる複数のセルの中から、カウント結果が入力される対象セルを特定するセル特定部として機能する。ＭＣＵ２０またはＭＣＵ３０は、ユーザの操作にしたがった計数指示を生成する計数指示部として機能する。メインカメラ１１は、計数指示部で生成された計数指示に基づいて検査個体の画像である検査画像を生成する第一撮像部として機能する。ＭＣＵ２０またはＭＣＵ３０は、前記第一撮像部で生成された検査画像に基づき検査個体に含まれるコロニーを計数する計数部として機能する。表管理部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、セル特定部で特定された対象セルに、計数部により計数されたコロニーの数を反映するように構成されている。このように、識別画像から、カウント結果を入力されることになるカウント表が特定されて表示されるため、コロニーの計数に関するユーザの負担が軽減される。　 [Aspect B1] The storage device 35 functions as a storage unit that stores a count table including cells into which colony count results for the test individual are input, and identification information associated with the count table. The MCU 30 and the MCU 20 function as an identification information acquisition unit that acquires the identification information from an identification image (eg, one-dimensional symbol, two-dimensional symbol) in which the identification information is encoded. The MCU 30 functions as a table management unit that reads the count table associated with the identification information acquired by the acquisition unit from the storage unit. Furthermore, the MCU 30 functions as a cell specifying section that specifies a target cell into which a count result is input from among a plurality of cells included in the count table read out by the table management section. The MCU 20 or MCU 30 functions as a counting instruction unit that generates counting instructions according to user operations. The main camera 11 functions as a first imaging section that generates a test image, which is an image of the test object, based on the counting instruction generated by the counting instruction section. The MCU 20 or MCU 30 functions as a counting unit that counts colonies included in the tested individual based on the test image generated by the first imaging unit. The table management unit (eg, MCU 30) is configured to reflect the number of colonies counted by the counting unit in the target cell specified by the cell specifying unit. In this way, the count table into which the count results are input is identified and displayed from the identification image, so the burden on the user regarding colony counting is reduced.　
［観点Ｂ２］　識別情報取得部は、第一撮像部（例：メインカメラ１１）により撮像された識別画像から識別情報を取得するように構成されていてもよい。このように、検査個体を撮像する撮像部を、識別画像を撮像する撮像部として兼用してもよい。　 [Aspect B2] The identification information acquisition unit may be configured to acquire identification information from an identification image captured by the first imaging unit (eg, main camera 11). In this way, the imaging unit that images the test individual may also be used as the imaging unit that images the identification image.　
［観点Ｂ３］　識別情報取得部は第二撮像部を有してもよい。フロントカメラ１０は、識別画像を撮像する第二撮像部の一例である。識別情報取得部（例：ＭＣＵ２０，３０）は、第二撮像部により撮像された識別画像から識別情報を取得するように構成されていてもよい。　 [Aspect B3] The identification information acquisition section may include a second imaging section. The front camera 10 is an example of a second imaging unit that captures an identification image. The identification information acquisition unit (eg, MCU 20, 30) may be configured to acquire identification information from the identification image captured by the second imaging unit.　
［観点Ｂ４］　第二撮像部（例：フロントカメラ１０）は、検査個体の外観、包装体（例：包装袋、商品パッケージ）により包装された検査個体の外観、および、当該包装体に印刷された情報のうちの少なくとも一つである付加画像を撮像するように構成されていてもよい。記憶部（例：記憶装置３５）は、対象セルに対して、付加画像と、当該付加画像から取得される付加情報とのうちの少なくとも一方を関連付けて記憶してもよい。上述されたように、カウント表は、カウント結果が入力されるセルと、画像等を格納可能なセル（例：備考セル、自由列のセル）を有してもよい。この場合、後者のセルには、付加画像（例：商品外観）や付加情報（例：商品コード）が格納されるか、関連付けられてもよい。ユーザは、対象セルに関連付けられて記憶されている付加情報または付加画像を参照することで、どの検査個体についてのカウント結果であるかを、容易に把握できるようになろう。　 [Viewpoint B4] The second imaging unit (e.g., front camera 10) captures the appearance of the test object, the appearance of the test object packaged in a package (e.g., packaging bag, product package), and the information printed on the package. The device may be configured to capture an additional image that is at least one of the added information. The storage unit (eg, storage device 35) may store at least one of an additional image and additional information acquired from the additional image in association with the target cell. As described above, the count table may have cells into which count results are input and cells in which images and the like can be stored (eg, notes cells, free column cells). In this case, additional images (eg, product appearance) and additional information (eg, product code) may be stored in or associated with the latter cell. By referring to the additional information or the additional image stored in association with the target cell, the user will be able to easily understand which individual to be examined corresponds to the count result.　
［
観点Ｂ５］　カウント表は、付加画像と付加情報とのうちの少なくとも一方を保持する付加セル（例：備考セル、自由列のセル）を含んでもよい。ユーザは、付加セルに保持されている付加情報または付加画像を参照することで、どの検査個体についてのカウント結果であるかを、容易に把握できるようになろう。　 [
Viewpoint B5] The count table may include additional cells (eg, notes cells, free column cells) that hold at least one of an additional image and additional information. By referring to the additional information or the additional image held in the additional cell, the user will be able to easily understand which test individual the count results are for.
［観点Ｂ６］　図２９や図４０が示すように、ＭＣＵ３０およびポインタ５７は、カウント表に存在する複数の付加セルから一つの付加セルを選択する選択部として機能してもよい。さらに、ＭＣＵ３０は、選択部により選択された一つの付加セルに、付加画像と付加情報とのうちの少なくとも一方を登録する付加情報登録部として機能してもよい。これにより、ユーザは、カウント表において希望するセルに対して付加画像や付加情報を登録することができる。　 [Aspect B6] As shown in FIGS. 29 and 40, the MCU 30 and the pointer 57 may function as a selection unit that selects one additional cell from a plurality of additional cells present in the count table. Furthermore, the MCU 30 may function as an additional information registration unit that registers at least one of an additional image and additional information in one additional cell selected by the selection unit. This allows the user to register additional images and additional information for desired cells in the count table.　
［観点Ｂ７］　ＭＣＵ３０は、対象セルに関連付けられている検査個体の識別情報（例：サンプル名、シャーレ番号）を入手する入手部として機能してもよい。記憶部は、ユーザにより入力される計数指示により第一撮像部により撮像された検査個体の検査画像を検査個体の識別情報と関連付けて記憶するように構成されていてもよい。従来、検査画像と検査個体との関係を正しく記録することは多くの工数が必要であった。たとえば、デジタルカメラで検査画像を取得することが考えられるが、この場合、検査画像と検査個体の識別情報とを人手による紐づけすること必要となるだろう。また、人手による紐づけは、ヒューマンエラーの原因となる。本実施例では、ＭＣＵ３０が対象セルを特定し、かつ、対象セルに関連付けられている検査個体の識別情報に対して検査個体の検査画像を関連付ける。よって、従来によりユーザに必要とされる項数が削減され、かつ、検査個体の検査画像と検査個体の識別情報との関係を正しく記録することが可能となる。　 [Aspect B7] The MCU 30 may function as an acquisition unit that acquires identification information (eg, sample name, petri dish number) of the test individual associated with the target cell. The storage unit may be configured to store an inspection image of the inspection individual captured by the first imaging unit in response to a counting instruction input by the user in association with identification information of the inspection individual. Conventionally, it has required a lot of man-hours to correctly record the relationship between an inspection image and an inspection individual. For example, it is conceivable to acquire test images with a digital camera, but in this case, it would be necessary to manually link the test images and the identification information of the test individual. Furthermore, manual linking may cause human error. In this embodiment, the MCU 30 identifies the target cell and associates the inspection image of the inspection individual with the identification information of the inspection individual associated with the target cell. Therefore, the number of items conventionally required by the user is reduced, and it becomes possible to correctly record the relationship between the inspection image of the inspection individual and the identification information of the inspection individual.　
［観点Ｂ８］　図３３が例示するように、ＭＣＵ３０は、検査個体の識別情報と、計数部により計数されたコロニーの数と、検査個体の検査画像と、を含むレポートを生成するレポート生成部として機能してもよい。これにより、ユーザは、どのサンプルの計測結果であるかを直感的に把握できるようになろう。　 [Viewpoint B8] As illustrated in FIG. 33, the MCU 30 functions as a report generation unit that generates a report including the identification information of the tested individual, the number of colonies counted by the counting unit, and the inspection image of the tested individual. It may work. With this, the user will be able to intuitively understand which sample the measurement result is.　
［観点Ｂ９］　カウント表においてコロニーの数を入力されるセルには固有のセル識別情報が付与されていてもよい。図４１が示すように、ＭＣＵ３０は、固有のセル識別情報を符号化した識別画像２２１をプリンタ３８によりシール２７０（粘着面を有する樹脂または紙）に印刷してもよい。ユーザは、シャーレ１５の側面にシール２７０を貼り付ける。なお、シャーレ番号は、固有のセル識別情報として利用されてもよい。識別情報取得部（例：ＭＣＵ３０、フロントカメラ１０またはメインカメラ１１）は、セル識別情報を取得するように構成されていてもよい。セル特定部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、識別情報取得部により取得されたセル識別情報に基づき対象セルを特定してもよい。これにより、ユーザが対象セルを指定する手間が省けるようになる。さらに、検査個体に対応した対象セルが正確に特定されるようになろう。　 [Aspect B9] Unique cell identification information may be given to the cell into which the number of colonies is input in the count table. As shown in FIG. 41, the MCU 30 may use the printer 38 to print an identification image 221 that encodes unique cell identification information on a sticker 270 (resin or paper with an adhesive surface). The user attaches a sticker 270 to the side of the Petri dish 15. Note that the petri dish number may be used as unique cell identification information. The identification information acquisition unit (eg, MCU 30, front camera 10, or main camera 11) may be configured to acquire cell identification information. The cell identification unit (eg, MCU 30) may identify the target cell based on the cell identification information acquired by the identification information acquisition unit. This saves the user the trouble of specifying the target cell. Furthermore, the target cell corresponding to the test individual will be accurately identified.　
［観点Ｂ１０］　図２８が示すように、識別情報取得部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、第一撮像部または第二撮像部によりユーザ認証情報を取得してもよい。これにより、ユーザ認証用の専用のカメラやコードリーダーを省略できるようになろう。　 [Aspect B10] As shown in FIG. 28, the identification information acquisition unit (eg, MCU 30) may acquire user authentication information using the first imaging unit or the second imaging unit. This will make it possible to omit a dedicated camera or code reader for user authentication.　
［観点Ｂ１１］　図２７が例示するように、識別情報取得部（例：ＭＣＵ３０、フロントカメラ１０またはメインカメラ１１）は、印刷媒体（例：検査リスト２２０）に印刷された識別画像から識別情報を取得するように構成されていてもよい。　 [Viewpoint B11] As illustrated in FIG. 27, the identification information acquisition unit (e.g. MCU 30, front camera 10 or main camera 11) acquires identification information from the identification image printed on the print medium (e.g. inspection list 220). The information may be configured to be obtained.　
［観点Ｂ１２］　ＭＣＵ３０は、カウント表と、当該カウント表に関連付けられた識別情報とを含む検査リストのデータを作成するデータ作成部として機能してもよい。　 [Aspect B12] The MCU 30 may function as a data creation unit that creates test list data that includes a count table and identification information associated with the count table.　
［観点Ｂ１３］　識別情報取得部（例：ＭＣＵ３０、フロントカメラ１０またはメインカメラ１１）は、端末装置１ｃに表示された識別画像から識別情報を取得するように構成されていてもよい。これにより、紙媒体を削減することが可能となる。　 [Aspect B13] The identification information acquisition unit (eg, MCU 30, front camera 10, or main camera 11) may be configured to acquire identification information from an identification image displayed on the terminal device 1c. This makes it possible to reduce paper media.　
［観点Ｂ１４］　通信回路３４は、端末装置１ｃと通信し、端末装置１ｃに識別画像を送信する通信部の一例である。　 [Aspect B14] The communication circuit 34 is an example of a communication unit that communicates with the terminal device 1c and transmits an identification image to the terminal device 1c.　
［観点Ｂ１５］　ＭＣＵ３０は、ユーザ操作に応じてカウント表を作成し、記憶部に当該カウント表を記憶させる作成部として機能してもよい。　 [Aspect B15] The MCU 30 may function as a creation unit that creates a count table in response to user operations and stores the count table in the storage unit.　
［観点Ｂ１６］　作成部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、コロニーの数のカウント結果を格納するセルに対して検査条件を関連付けてもよい。第一撮像部は、検査条件（例：露光時間、照明の種類、明るさ）にしたがって検査個体を撮像するように構成されていてもよい。　 [Viewpoint B16] The creation unit (eg, MCU 30) may associate test conditions with cells that store the result of counting the number of colonies. The first imaging unit may be configured to image the individual to be inspected according to inspection conditions (eg, exposure time, type of illumination, brightness).　
［観点Ｂ１７］　コロニー計数装置１は、第一撮像部を有する筐体（例：上部ユニット２、支持ユニット３および下部ユニット４）をさらに有してもよい。　 [Viewpoint B17] The colony counting device 1 may further include a housing (eg, upper unit 2, support unit 3, and lower unit 4) having a first imaging section.　
筐体は、検査個体を収容したシャーレ１５を保持するステージ５と、検査個体を照明する照明部（例：リング照明装置１２、１３、同軸照明装置１４）と、ユーザにより入力される計数指示を受け付ける受付部（例：第一ハードウエアボタン８ａ）と、を有してもよい。　 The casing includes a stage 5 that holds a petri dish 15 containing test specimens, a lighting section (e.g. ring lighting devices 12, 13, coaxial lighting device 14) that illuminates the test specimens, and a counting instruction input by the user. It may also include a reception unit (eg, first hardware button 8a) that accepts the request.　
［観点Ｂ１８］　コロニー計数装置１は、第一撮像部および第二撮像部を有する筐体（例：上部ユニット２、支持ユニット３および下部ユニット４）をさらに有してもよい。筐体は、検査個体を収容したシャーレ１５を保持するステージ５と、検査個体を照明する照明部（例：リング照明装置１２、１３、同軸照明装置１４）と、ユーザにより入力される計数指示を受け付ける受付部（例：第一ハードウエアボタン８ａ）とを有してもよい。さらに、筐体は、凹部４ａを有してもよい。第二撮像部（例：フロントカメラ１０）は、凹部に配置されていてもよい。受付部（例：第一ハードウエアボタン８ａ）は、ステージと凹部との間にある操作部（操作部８）に配置されていてもよい。これにより、簡単に、計数指示を入力することが可能となる。　 [Viewpoint B18] The colony counting device 1 may further include a housing (eg, upper unit 2, support unit 3, and lower unit 4) that includes a first imaging section and a second imaging section. The casing includes a stage 5 that holds a petri dish 15 containing test specimens, a lighting section (e.g. ring lighting devices 12, 13, coaxial lighting device 14) that illuminates the test specimens, and a counting instruction input by the user. It may also include a reception unit (eg, first hardware button 8a) that accepts the request. Furthermore, the housing may have a recess 4a. The second imaging unit (eg, front camera 10) may be placed in the recess. The reception section (eg, first hardware button 8a) may be arranged in an operation section (operation section 8) between the stage and the recess. This makes it possible to easily input counting instructions.　
［観点Ｂ１９］　コロニー計数装置１が第一状態にあるときに受付部（例：第一ハードウエアボタン８ａ）が撮像指示を受け付けると、第一撮像部が撮像を実行してもよい。コロニー計数装置１が第一状態と異なる第二状態にあるときに受付部が撮像指示を受け付けると、第二撮像部が撮像を実行してもよい。これにより、単一の受付部に対する同一の操作であるにも拘らず、異なる撮像部に撮像を指示することが可能となる。第一状態とは、たとえば、カウント表がすでに特定された状態である。第二状態とは、たとえば、カウント表がまだ特定されていない状態である。　 [Viewpoint B19] When the reception unit (eg, first hardware button 8a) receives an imaging instruction when the colony counting device 1 is in the first state, the first imaging unit may perform imaging. If the reception unit receives an imaging instruction while the colony counting device 1 is in a second state different from the first state, the second imaging unit may perform imaging. This makes it possible to instruct different imaging units to capture images even though the same operation is performed on a single reception unit. The first state is, for example, a state in which a count table has already been specified. The second state is, for example, a state where the count table has not yet been specified.　
［観点Ｂ２０］　コロニー計数装置を制御するプロセッサにおいて実行されるプログラムであって、プロセッサに、　検査個体についてのコロニーのカウント結果が入力されるセルを含むカウント表と、当該カウント表に関連付けられた識別情報と、を記憶部に記憶させ、　前記識別情報を符号化した識別画像から当該識別情報を取得させ、　前記取得された前記識別情報に関連付けられている前記カウント表を前記記憶部から読み出させ、　前記読み出されたカウント表に含まれる複数のセルの中から、カウント結果が入力される対象セルを特定させ、　ユーザの操作にしたがった計数指示を生成させ、　前記生成された計数指示に基づき前記検査個体の画像である検査画像を生成させ、　前記生成された検査画像に基づき前記検査個体に含まれるコロニーを計数させ、　前記特定された対象セルに、前記計数されたコロニーの数を反映させる。　 [Viewpoint B20] A program executed in a processor that controls a colony counting device, which provides a count table including cells into which colony count results for test individuals are input, and an identification associated with the count table. information, in a storage unit, acquire the identification information from an identification image in which the identification information is encoded, and read out the count table associated with the acquired identification information from the storage unit. , from among the plurality of cells included in the read count table, specify the target cell into which the count result will be input, generate a counting instruction according to the user's operation, and based on the generated counting instruction Generate a test image that is an image of the test individual, count the colonies included in the test individual based on the generated test image, and reflect the counted number of colonies in the specified target cell. .　
［観点Ｂ２３］　コロニー計数装置を制御するプロセッサにおいて実行される制御方法であって、　検査個体についてのコロニーのカウント結果が入力されるセルを含むカウント表と、当該カウント表に関連付けられた識別情報と、を記憶部に記憶することと、　識別情報を符号化した識別画像から当該識別情報を取得することと、　前記取得された前記識別情報に関連付けられている前記カウント表を前記記憶部から読み出すことと、　前記読み出されたカウント表に含まれる複数のセルの中から、カウント結果が入力される対象セルを特定することと、　ユーザの操作にしたがった計数指示を生成することと、　前記生成された計数指示に基づき、前記検査個体の画像である検査画像を生成することと、　前記生成された検査画像に基づき前記検査個体に含まれるコロニーを計数することと、　前記特定された対象セルに、前記計数されたコロニーの数を反映することと、を有する。　 [Aspect B23] A control method executed in a processor that controls a colony counting device, which includes a count table including cells into which colony count results for test individuals are input, and identification information associated with the count table. , in a storage unit, acquiring the identification information from an identification image in which the identification information is encoded, and reading out the count table associated with the acquired identification information from the storage unit. and identifying a target cell into which a count result will be input from among the plurality of cells included in the read count table; generating a counting instruction according to the user's operation; generating a test image, which is an image of the test individual, based on the counting instruction, counting colonies included in the test individual based on the generated test image; reflecting the number of colonies counted.　
［観点Ｃ１］　リング照明装置１２は、検査個体を照明する照明部の一例である。また、リング照明装置１２は、それぞれ異なる複数の照明方向のうちのいずれかの照明方向から検査個体を照明する照明部の一例である。リング照明装置１２は、照明方向を切り替えて検査個体を照明する照明部の一例である。メインカメラ１１は、照明部により照明された検査個体を撮影し、画像データを生成する撮像部の一例である。また、メインカメラ１１は、複数の照明方向のうち指定された照明方向から照明部により照明された検査個体を撮影し、各照明方向ごとの複数の第一画像データを生成する撮像部の一例である。ＭＣＵ２０およびＭＣＵ３０は、照明部と撮像部とを制御する制御部の一例である。ＭＣＵ２０およびＭＣＵ３０は、照明部の照明方向を順次切り替えて照明部により照明された検査個体を、撮像部により撮影させて、検査個体についてそれぞれ照明方向が異なる複数の第一画像データを生成させるよう撮像部を制御する制御部の一例である。記憶装置３５は、画像データ（例： 複数の第一画像データ）を記憶する記憶部の一例である。ＭＣＵ２０またはＭＣＵ３０は、記憶部に記憶されている画像データから光沢の低減された検査画像を生成する画像生成部の一例である。たとえば、ＭＣＵ２０またはＭＣＵ３０は、記憶部に記憶されている複数の第一画像データ（例：画像データ４０１ａ～４０１ｄ）を合成して光沢の低減された検査画像（例：光沢低減４０２）を生成する画像生成部として機能する。ＭＣＵ２０またはＭＣＵ３０は、検査画像に含まれるコロニーを計数する計数部として機能する。制御部（例：ＭＣＵ２０、ＭＣＵ３０）は、照明部の照明方向を順番に切り替えさせながら、撮像部に検査個体を撮影させて、それぞれ照明方向が異なる複数の第一画像データを生成させ、記憶部記複数の第一画像データを記憶させる。画像生成部（例：ＭＣＵ２０、３０）は、検査画像を生成するために検査画像を構成することになる複数の画素を順番に注目画素として選択し、複数の第一画像データからそれぞれ当該注目画素に対応する座標の画素の画素値を読み出し、読み出された複数の画素値に基づき光沢の抑制された画素値を求め、求められた当該画素値を検査画像における当該注目画素の画素値に決定する。つまり、画像生成部は、検査個体についてそれぞれ照明方向が異なる複数の第一画像データに基づいて光沢の低減された検査画像を生成する際に、検査画像の各画素の画素値として、各画素に対応する複数の第一画像データの画素の画素値に基づき光沢の低減された画素値を決定する。これにより、光沢が低減されるため、コロニーの計数精度が向上する。　 [Viewpoint C1] The ring illumination device 12 is an example of a lighting unit that illuminates the inspection object. Further, the ring illumination device 12 is an example of an illumination unit that illuminates the inspection object from one of a plurality of different illumination directions. The ring illumination device 12 is an example of an illumination unit that illuminates the inspection object by switching the illumination direction. The main camera 11 is an example of an imaging unit that photographs the inspection object illuminated by the illumination unit and generates image data. Further, the main camera 11 is an example of an imaging unit that photographs the test specimen illuminated by the illumination unit from a specified illumination direction among a plurality of illumination directions, and generates a plurality of first image data for each illumination direction. be. MCU20 and MCU30 are examples of control units that control the illumination unit and the imaging unit. The MCU 20 and the MCU 30 sequentially switch the illumination direction of the illumination unit to cause the imaging unit to photograph the inspection individual illuminated by the illumination unit, and perform imaging so as to generate a plurality of first image data each having a different illumination direction for the inspection individual. This is an example of a control section that controls the section. The storage device 35 is an example of a storage unit that stores image data (eg, a plurality of first image data). The MCU 20 or MCU 30 is an example of an image generation unit that generates an inspection image with reduced gloss from image data stored in a storage unit. For example, the MCU 20 or MCU 30 synthesizes a plurality of pieces of first image data (e.g., image data 401a to 401d) stored in the storage unit to generate an inspection image with reduced gloss (e.g., reduced gloss 402). Functions as an image generator. MCU20 or MCU30 functions as a counting unit that counts colonies included in the inspection image. The control unit (e.g. MCU 20, MCU 30) causes the imaging unit to photograph the test individual while sequentially switching the illumination direction of the illumination unit, generates a plurality of first image data each having a different illumination direction, and stores the data in the storage unit. A plurality of first image data are stored. In order to generate an inspection image, the image generation unit (e.g. MCU 20, 30) sequentially selects a plurality of pixels that will constitute the inspection image as the pixel of interest, and selects each of the pixels of interest from the plurality of first image data. Reads the pixel value of the pixel at the coordinates corresponding to , determines the pixel value with suppressed gloss based on the multiple read pixel values, and determines the determined pixel value as the pixel value of the target pixel in the inspection image. do. In other words, when generating an inspection image with reduced gloss based on a plurality of first image data having different illumination directions for each individual to be inspected, the image generation unit sets the pixel value of each pixel of the inspection image to A pixel value with reduced gloss is determined based on the pixel value of the pixel of the plurality of corresponding first image data. This reduces gloss and improves colony counting accuracy.　
［観点Ｃ２］　計数部（例：ＭＣＵ２０、３０）は、画像生成部において光沢低減処理を適用されて生成された検査画像（例：光沢低減画像４０２）からコロニーを計数する光沢低減モードと、光沢低減処理を適用されていない検査画像（例：全方向照明画像４０３）からコロニーを計数する光沢非低減モードとのいずれかにしたがって動作してもよい。これにより、光沢低減処理を適用された画像と、光沢低減処理を適用されていない画像との両方がユーザに対して提供可能となる。　 [Viewpoint C2] The counting unit (e.g. MCU 20, 30) operates in a gloss reduction mode in which colonies are counted from the inspection image (e.g. gloss reduction image 402) generated by applying gloss reduction processing in the image generation unit; It may operate according to either a gloss non-reduction mode in which colonies are counted from an inspection image to which no reduction processing has been applied (eg, omnidirectional illumination image 403). This makes it possible to provide the user with both an image to which the gloss reduction process has been applied and an image to which the gloss reduction process has not been applied.　
［観点Ｃ３］　光沢非低減モードにおいて、照明部は、複数の照明方向から同時に検査個体を照明するように構成されており、撮像部は、複数の照明方向から同時に照明部により照明された検査個体を撮影し、第二画像データ（例：全方向照明画像４０３）を生成する
ように構成されており、記憶部は、第二画像データを記憶するように構成されており、計数部は、第二画像データに含まれるコロニーを計数するように構成されていてもよい。光沢非低減モードは、通常モードや標準モードと呼ばれてもよい。　 [Viewpoint C3] In the non-glossy reduction mode, the illumination unit is configured to simultaneously illuminate the inspection object from a plurality of illumination directions, and the imaging unit illuminates the inspection object simultaneously illuminated by the illumination unit from a plurality of illumination directions. The storage unit is configured to capture the second image data (e.g. omnidirectional illumination image 403), and the storage unit is configured to store the second image data. It may be configured to count colonies included in two image data. The non-gloss reduction mode may also be called a normal mode or a standard mode.
［観点Ｃ４］　光沢非低減モードにおいて、照明部は、複数の照明方向のうち指定された照明方向から検査個体を照明するように構成されており、撮像部は、照明部により照明された検査個体を撮影し、各照明方向ごとの複数の第一画像データを生成するように構成されており、　記憶部は、複数の第一画像データを記憶するように構成されており、画像生成部は、記憶部に記憶されている複数の第一画像データを合成して、複数の照明方向から同時に照明された検査個体の画像データに相当する第二画像データを生成するように構成されており、　記憶部は、第二画像データを記憶するように構成されており、計数部は、第二画像データに含まれるコロニーを計数するように構成されていてもよい。このように、全方向照明画像４０３が、それぞれ照明方向が異なる複数の画像データ４０１ａ～４０１ｄから擬似的に作成されてもよい。これにより、撮影回数を削減することが可能となろう。　 [Viewpoint C4] In the non-glossy reduction mode, the illumination section is configured to illuminate the inspection object from a specified illumination direction among a plurality of illumination directions, and the imaging section is configured to illuminate the inspection object illuminated by the illumination section. The image generator is configured to capture a plurality of first image data and generate a plurality of first image data for each illumination direction, the storage unit is configured to store the plurality of first image data, and the image generation unit is configured to: It is configured to synthesize the plurality of first image data stored in the storage unit to generate second image data corresponding to image data of the test individual illuminated simultaneously from a plurality of illumination directions, The unit may be configured to store the second image data, and the counting unit may be configured to count colonies included in the second image data. In this way, the omnidirectional illumination image 403 may be created in a pseudo manner from a plurality of image data 401a to 401d each having a different illumination direction. This will make it possible to reduce the number of shots taken.　
［観点Ｃ５］　カウント設定ＵＩ４１０やＭＣＵ３０は、培地の種別の入力を受け付ける受付部の一例である。ＭＣＵ３０は、受付部により受け付けられた培地の種別に応じて光沢低減モードまたは光沢非低減モードを選択する選択部の一例である。このように、ユーザは培地の種別を選択するだけで、培地に適したモードが選択されるようになろう。これにより、個人ごとのカウントの癖などを排除することが可能となり、コロニーの計数精度が向上するだろう。　 [Viewpoint C5] The count setting UI 410 and the MCU 30 are examples of a reception unit that accepts input of the type of culture medium. The MCU 30 is an example of a selection unit that selects a gloss reduction mode or a non-glossy reduction mode according to the type of culture medium accepted by the reception unit. In this way, the user only has to select the type of medium, and the mode suitable for the medium will be selected. This will make it possible to eliminate individual counting habits and improve the accuracy of colony counting.　
記憶部（例：記憶装置３５）は、複数の培地の種別のそれぞれに対して、光沢低減モードまたは光沢非低減モードを関連付けて記憶するように構成されていてもよい。選択部（例：ＭＣＵ３０）は、記憶部を参照することで、受付部により受け付けられた培地の種別に関連付けられている光沢低減モードまたは光沢非低減モードを選択してもよい。このように、培地の種別とモードとの対応関係は予め記憶されていてもよい。　 The storage unit (eg, storage device 35) may be configured to store a gloss reduction mode or a non-glossy reduction mode in association with each of a plurality of culture medium types. The selection unit (eg, MCU 30) may select the gloss reduction mode or non-glossy reduction mode associated with the type of culture medium accepted by the reception unit by referring to the storage unit. In this way, the correspondence between the type of culture medium and the mode may be stored in advance.　
［観点Ｃ６］　ＭＣＵ３０は、複数の培地の種別のそれぞれに対して、光沢低減モードと光沢非低減モードとのどちらを関連付けるかを、ユーザ操作に応じて、登録する登録部として機能してもよい。ＭＣＵ３０は、表示装置３７に登録用のユーザインタフェースを表示し、当該ユーザインタフェースに対するユーザ操作に応じて、培地の種別に対してモードを関連付けてもよいだろう。たとえば、コロニーの計数に成熟したユーザは培地ごとの適切なモードを知っている。このようなユーザが登録処理を実行しておけば、他のユーザが検査を実行しても同一のカウント結果が得られるようになろう。つまり、コロニーの計数精度が向上する。　 [Viewpoint C6] The MCU 30 may function as a registration unit that registers whether to associate gloss reduction mode or non-glossy reduction mode with each of a plurality of culture medium types according to user operations. . The MCU 30 may display a user interface for registration on the display device 37, and may associate a mode with a type of culture medium in accordance with a user operation on the user interface. For example, a user experienced in counting colonies will know the appropriate mode for each medium. If such a user executes the registration process, the same count result will be obtained even if another user executes the test. In other words, colony counting accuracy is improved.　
［観点Ｃ７］　計数部（例：ＭＣＵ２０、３０）は、光沢低減モードと光沢非低減モードとの双方においてコロニーの個数を計数するように構成されていてもよい。ＭＣＵ３０は、光沢低減モードと光沢非低減モードとの双方において取得されたコロニーの個数を表示装置３７に表示してもよい。これにより、ユーザは、光沢低減処理の有効性を確認してもよいだろう。　 [Viewpoint C7] The counting unit (eg, MCU 20, 30) may be configured to count the number of colonies in both the gloss reduction mode and the non-glossy reduction mode. The MCU 30 may display the number of colonies acquired in both the gloss reduction mode and the non-glossy reduction mode on the display device 37. This may allow the user to confirm the effectiveness of the gloss reduction process.　
［観点Ｃ８］　図５０などが例示するように、計数部（例：ＭＣＵ２０、３０）は、光沢低減モードにおいてコロニーを検出するように構成されており、光沢非低減モードにおいて撮像部により取得された第二画像データを参照し、第二画像データにおいて、検出されたコロニーに対応する画素の画素値に基づき、検出されたコロニーの種類を分類してもよい。コロニーの種類を分類することで、ユーザは、どのような種類のコロニーが成長したのかを簡単に知ることができるであろう。　 [Viewpoint C8] As illustrated in FIG. 50 and the like, the counting unit (e.g. MCU 20, 30) is configured to detect colonies in the gloss reduction mode, and detects colonies acquired by the imaging unit in the non-glossy reduction mode. With reference to the second image data, the type of the detected colony may be classified based on the pixel value of the pixel corresponding to the detected colony in the second image data. By classifying the type of colony, the user will be able to easily know what type of colony has grown.　
［観点Ｃ９］　図５０などが例示するように、計数部（例：ＭＣＵ２０、３０）は、検出されたコロニーに対応する画素について第二画像データからヒストグラムを求め、当該ヒストグラムに基づき、当該検出されたコロニーを光沢コロニーまたは非光沢コロニーに分類してもよい。ヒストグラムには、コロニーの特徴が表れていることが多い。そのため、ヒストグラムに着目することで、より正確に光沢コロニーと非光沢コロニーとが正確に分類されるようになろう。　 [Viewpoint C9] As illustrated in FIG. 50, the counting unit (e.g. MCU 20, 30) obtains a histogram from the second image data for the pixel corresponding to the detected colony, and based on the histogram, calculates the number of pixels corresponding to the detected colony. Colonies that appear may be classified as shiny colonies or non-shiny colonies. Histograms often show characteristics of colonies. Therefore, by focusing on the histogram, glossy colonies and non-glossy colonies can be more accurately classified.　
［観点Ｃ１０］　計数部（例：ＭＣＵ２０、３０）は、光沢コロニーと非光沢コロニーとの双方を計数するように構成されていてもよい。これにより、ユーザは、高さ方向に成長しやすいコロニーの個数と、高さ方向に成長しにくいコロニーの個数と、を把握することができるだろう。　 [Viewpoint C10] The counting unit (eg, MCU 20, 30) may be configured to count both glossy colonies and non-glossy colonies. Thereby, the user will be able to grasp the number of colonies that are likely to grow in the height direction and the number of colonies that are difficult to grow in the height direction.　
［観点Ｃ１１］　本実施例によれば、コロニー計数方法が提供される。コロニー計数方法は、たとえば、　照明方向を切り替えて検査個体を照明部により照明すると、　照明部により照明された検査個体を撮像部により撮影し、画像データを生成することと、　照明方向を順次切り替えて照明部により照明された検査個体を、撮像部により撮影させて、検査個体についてそれぞれ照明方向が異なる複数の第一画像データを生成させるよう撮像部を制御することと、　検査個体についてそれぞれ照明方向が異なる複数の第一画像データに基づいて光沢の低減された検査画像を生成する際に、当該検査画像の各画素の画素値として、当該各画素に対応する当該複数の第一画像データの画素の画素値に基づき光沢の低減された画素値を決定することと、　検査画像に含まれるコロニーを計数することと、を有する。　 [Aspect C11] According to this embodiment, a colony counting method is provided. The colony counting method, for example, involves switching the illumination direction and illuminating the test specimen with the illumination section, then photographing the test specimen illuminated by the illumination section with the imaging section and generating image data, and sequentially switching the illumination direction. Controlling the imaging unit to cause the imaging unit to photograph the inspection individual illuminated by the illumination unit to generate a plurality of first image data each having a different illumination direction for the inspection individual; When generating an inspection image with reduced gloss based on a plurality of different first image data, the pixel value of each pixel of the inspection image is determined by the pixel value of each pixel of the plurality of first image data corresponding to each pixel. The method includes determining a pixel value with reduced gloss based on the pixel value, and counting colonies included in the inspection image.　
［観点Ｃ１３］　本実施例によれば、プログラム（例：制御プログラム２７、アプリケーションプログラム３９）が提供される。当該プログラムは、　照明方向を切り替えて検査個体を照明部により照明すると、　照明部により照明された検査個体を撮像部により撮影し、画像データを生成することと、　照明方向を順次切り替えて照明部により照明された検査個体を、撮像部により撮影させて、検査個体についてそれぞれ照明方向が異なる複数の第一画像データを生成させるよう撮像部を制御することと、　検査個体についてそれぞれ照明方向が異なる複数の第一画像データに基づいて光沢の低減された検査画像を生成する際に、当該検査画像の各画素の画素値として、当該各画素に対応する当該複数の第一画像データの画素の画素値に基づき光沢の低減された画素値を決定することと、　検査画像に含まれるコロニーを計数することと、をコンピュータに実行させる。　 [Aspect C13] According to this embodiment, programs (eg, control program 27, application program 39) are provided. This program switches the illumination direction and illuminates the test specimen with the illumination unit, the imaging unit photographs the test specimen illuminated by the illumination unit and generates image data, and the illumination direction is sequentially switched and the test specimen is illuminated by the illumination unit. Controlling the imaging unit so as to cause the imaging unit to photograph the illuminated test individual and generate a plurality of first image data each having a different illumination direction for the test individual; When generating an inspection image with reduced gloss based on the first image data, the pixel value of each pixel of the plurality of first image data corresponding to each pixel is used as the pixel value of each pixel of the inspection image. A computer is caused to determine a pixel value with reduced gloss based on the test image, and to count colonies included in the inspection image.　
発明は上記の実施形態に制限されるものではなく、発明の要旨の範囲内で、種々の変形・変更が可能である。 The invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the invention.
１：コロニー計数装置、３５：記憶装置、３０：ＭＣＵ 1: colony counting device, 35: storage device, 30: MCU

Claims (12)

  1. 照明方向を切り替えて検査個体を照明する照明部と、　前記照明部により照明された検査個体を撮影し、画像データを生成する撮像部と、　前記照明部の照明方向を順次切り替えて前記照明部により照明された検査個体を、前記撮像部により撮影させて、前記検査個体についてそれぞれ照明方向が異なる複数の第一画像データを生成させるよう前記撮像部を制御する制御部と、　前記検査個体についてそれぞれ照明方向が異なる前記複数の第一画像データに基づいて光沢の低減された検査画像を生成する際に、当該検査画像の各画素の画素値として、当該各画素に対応する当該複数の第一画像データの画素の画素値に基づき光沢の低減された画素値を決定する画像生成部と、　前記検査画像に含まれるコロニーを計数する計数部と、を有するコロニー計数装置。 an illumination unit that illuminates the test specimen by switching the illumination direction; an imaging unit that photographs the test specimen illuminated by the illumination unit and generates image data; and an imaging unit that sequentially switches the illumination direction of the illumination unit to illuminate the test specimen a control unit that controls the imaging unit to cause the imaging unit to photograph the illuminated inspection individual and generate a plurality of first image data each having a different illumination direction for the inspection individual; When generating an inspection image with reduced gloss based on the plurality of first image data having different directions, the plurality of first image data corresponding to each pixel is used as a pixel value of each pixel of the inspection image. A colony counting device comprising: an image generation unit that determines a pixel value with reduced gloss based on the pixel value of the pixel; and a counting unit that counts colonies included in the inspection image.
  2. 請求項１に記載のコロニー計数装置であって、　前記計数部は、　　　前記画像生成部において光沢低減処理を適用されて生成された検査画像から前記コロニーを計数する光沢低減モードと、　　　前記光沢低減処理を適用されていない検査画像から前記コロニーを計数する光沢非低減モードと、のいずれかにしたがって動作する、コロニー計数装置。 2. The colony counting device according to claim 1, wherein the counting section includes: a gloss reduction mode in which the colonies are counted from an inspection image generated by applying gloss reduction processing in the image generation section; a colony counting device operating according to one of the following: a non-reduced gloss mode;
  3. 請求項２に記載のコロニー計数装置であって、　前記光沢非低減モードにおいて、　　　前記照明部は、複数の照明方向から同時に前記検査個体を照明するように構成されており、　　　前記撮像部は、前記複数の照明方向から同時に前記照明部により照明された前記検査個体を撮影し、第二画像データを生成するように構成されており、　　　前記計数部は、前記第二画像データに含まれるコロニーを計数するように構成されている、コロニー計数装置。 3. The colony counting device according to claim 2, wherein in the non-glossy reduction mode, the illumination section is configured to simultaneously illuminate the inspection individual from a plurality of illumination directions, and the imaging section is configured to illuminate the inspection individual from a plurality of illumination directions simultaneously. The test specimen illuminated by the illumination unit is photographed simultaneously from a plurality of illumination directions to generate second image data, and the counting unit counts colonies included in the second image data. A colony counting device configured to:
  4. 請求項２に記載のコロニー計数装置であって、　前記光沢非低減モードにおいて、　　　前記照明部は、複数の照明方向のうち指定された照明方向から前記検査個体を照明するように構成されており、　　　前記撮像部は、前記照明部により照明された前記検査個体を撮影し、各照明方向ごとの前記複数の第一画像データを生成するように構成されており、　　　前記画像生成部は、前記複数の第一画像データを合成して、前記複数の照明方向から同時に照明された前記検査個体の画像データに相当する第二画像データを生成するように構成されており、　　　前記計数部は、前記第二画像データに含まれるコロニーを計数するように構成されている、コロニー計数装置。 The colony counting device according to claim 2, wherein in the non-glossy reduction mode, the illumination unit is configured to illuminate the test individual from a specified illumination direction among a plurality of illumination directions, The imaging unit is configured to photograph the inspection object illuminated by the illumination unit and generate the plurality of first image data for each illumination direction, and the image generation unit is configured to photograph the inspection object illuminated by the illumination unit. The first image data is combined to generate second image data corresponding to the image data of the inspection individual illuminated simultaneously from the plurality of illumination directions, and the counting unit A colony counting device configured to count colonies included in image data.
  5. 請求項２に記載のコロニー計数装置であって、　培地の種別の入力を受け付ける受付部と、　前記受付部により受け付けられた前記培地の種別に応じて前記光沢低減モードまたは前記光沢非低減モードを選択する選択部と、　複数の培地の種別のそれぞれに対して、前記光沢低減モードまたは前記光沢非低減モードを関連付けて記憶する記憶部と、をさらに有し、　前記選択部は、前記記憶部を参照することで、前記受付部により受け付けられた前記培地の種別に関連付けられている前記光沢低減モードまたは前記光沢非低減モードを選択する、ように構成されている、コロニー計数装置。 3. The colony counting device according to claim 2, further comprising: a reception unit that receives an input of a type of medium, and selects the gloss reduction mode or the non-glossy reduction mode according to the type of the medium accepted by the reception unit. and a storage section that associates and stores the gloss reduction mode or the non-glossy reduction mode for each of the plurality of culture medium types, and the selection section refers to the storage section. The colony counting device is configured to select the gloss reduction mode or the non-glossy reduction mode associated with the type of the culture medium accepted by the reception unit.
  6. 請求項５に記載のコロニー計数装置であって、　複数の培地の種別のそれぞれに対して、前記光沢低減モードと前記光沢非低減モードとのどちらを関連付けるかを、ユーザ操作に応じて、登録する登録部をさらに有する、コロニー計数装置。 6. The colony counting device according to claim 5, wherein for each of a plurality of medium types, which of the gloss reduction mode and the non-glossy reduction mode is to be associated is registered according to a user operation. A colony counting device further comprising a registration section.
  7. 請求項２に記載のコロニー計数装置であって、　前記計数部は、前記光沢低減モードと前記光沢非低減モードとの双方において前記コロニーの個数を計数するように構成されている、コロニー計数装置。 The colony counting device according to claim 2, wherein the counting section is configured to count the number of colonies in both the gloss reduction mode and the non-glossy reduction mode.
  8. 請求項３に記載のコロニー計数装置であって、　前記計数部は、　　　前記光沢低減モードにおいて前記コロニーを検出するように構成されており、　　　前記光沢非低減モードにおいて前記撮像部により取得された第二画像データを参照し、前記第二画像データにおいて、前記検出されたコロニーに対応する画素の画素値に基づき、前記検出されたコロニーの種類を分類するように構成されている、コロニー計数装置。 4. The colony counting device according to claim 3, wherein the counting section is configured to detect the colonies in the gloss reduction mode, and the second colony counting section acquired by the imaging section in the non-glossy reduction mode. A colony counting device configured to refer to image data and classify the type of the detected colony based on a pixel value of a pixel corresponding to the detected colony in the second image data.
  9. 請求項８に記載のコロニー計数装置であって、　前記計数部は、　　　前記検出されたコロニーに対応する画素について前記第二画像データからヒストグラムを求め、当該ヒストグラムに基づき、当該検出されたコロニーを光沢コロニーまたは非光沢コロニーに分類するように構成されている、コロニー計数装置。 9. The colony counting device according to claim 8, wherein the counting section obtains a histogram from the second image data for pixels corresponding to the detected colony, and based on the histogram, glossifies the detected colony. A colony counting device configured to classify colonies or matte colonies.
  10. 請求項９に記載のコロニー計数装置であって、　前記計数部は、前記光沢コロニーと前記非光沢コロニーとの双方を計数するように構成されている、コロニー計数装置。 The colony counting device according to claim 9, wherein the counting section is configured to count both the shiny colonies and the non-glossy colonies.
  11. 照明方向を切り替えて検査個体を照明部により照明すると、　前記照明部により照明された検査個体を撮像部により撮影し、画像データを生成することと、　前記照明方向を順次切り替えて照明部により照明された検査個体を、前記撮像部により撮影させて、前記検査個体についてそれぞれ照明方向が異なる複数の第一画像データを生成させるよう前記撮像部を制御することと、　前記検査個体についてそれぞれ照明方向が異なる前記複数の第一画像データに基づいて光沢の低減された検査画像を生成する際に、当該検査画像の各画素の画素値として、当該各画素に対応する当該複数の第一画像データの画素の画素値に基づき光沢の低減された画素値を決定することと
    、　前記検査画像に含まれるコロニーを計数することと、を有する、コロニー計数方法。     switching the illumination direction and illuminating the specimen to be inspected by the illumination unit; photographing the specimen to be inspected illuminated by the illumination unit by the imaging unit to generate image data; and sequentially switching the illumination direction to illuminate the specimen by the illumination unit. controlling the imaging unit so as to cause the imaging unit to photograph the inspected individual to generate a plurality of first image data each having a different illumination direction for the inspecting individual; When generating an inspection image with reduced gloss based on the plurality of first image data, the pixel value of each pixel of the inspection image is determined by the pixel value of the plurality of first image data corresponding to each pixel. A colony counting method comprising: determining a pixel value with reduced gloss based on the pixel value; and counting colonies included in the inspection image.
  12. 照明方向を切り替えて検査個体を照明部により照明すると、　前記照明部により照明された検査個体を撮像部により撮影し、画像データを生成することと、　前記照明方向を順次切り替えて照明部により照明された検査個体を、前記撮像部により撮影させて、前記検査個体についてそれぞれ照明方向が異なる複数の第一画像データを生成させるよう前記撮像部を制御することと、　前記検査個体についてそれぞれ照明方向が異なる前記複数の第一画像データに基づいて光沢の低減された検査画像を生成する際に、当該検査画像の各画素の画素値として、当該各画素に対応する当該複数の第一画像データの画素の画素値に基づき光沢の低減された画素値を決定することと、　前記検査画像に含まれるコロニーを計数することと、をコンピュータに実行させる、プログラム。 When the illumination direction is switched and the inspection object is illuminated by the illumination section, the inspection object illuminated by the illumination section is photographed by the imaging section and image data is generated, and the illumination direction is sequentially switched and the inspection object is illuminated by the illumination section. controlling the imaging unit to cause the imaging unit to photograph the inspected individual to generate a plurality of first image data each having a different illumination direction for the inspecting individual; When generating an inspection image with reduced gloss based on the plurality of first image data, the pixel value of each pixel of the inspection image is determined by the pixel value of the plurality of first image data corresponding to each pixel. A program that causes a computer to determine a pixel value with reduced gloss based on the pixel value and count colonies included in the inspection image.
PCT/JP2023/017660 2022-08-09 2023-05-11 Colony counting device, control method, and program WO2024034207A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022-127159 2022-08-09
JP2022127159 2022-08-09

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024034207A1 true WO2024034207A1 (en) 2024-02-15

Family

ID=89851465

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2023/017660 WO2024034207A1 (en) 2022-08-09 2023-05-11 Colony counting device, control method, and program

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2024034207A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2014514580A (en) * 2011-05-06 2014-06-19 ビオメリュー Bioimaging method and system
JP2018013740A (en) * 2016-07-22 2018-01-25 株式会社キーエンス Magnification observation device

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2014514580A (en) * 2011-05-06 2014-06-19 ビオメリュー Bioimaging method and system
JP2018013740A (en) * 2016-07-22 2018-01-25 株式会社キーエンス Magnification observation device

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
NAKAMURA H, OGASAWARA J, YASUFUKU K, ARIKAWA K, OHYAMA M, ABE N, HASE A: "Identification and Comparison of Isolates from Several Coliform Group Detection Agar Medium.", JAPANESE SOCIETY OF FOOD MICROBIOLOGY GAKUJUTSU SOKAI KOEN YOSHISHU, vol. 29, no. 3, 1 January 2012 (2012-01-01), pages 164 - 169, XP009552635, ISSN: 1340-8267 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7925070B2 (en) Method for displaying virtual slide and terminal device for displaying virtual slide
JP6698663B2 (en) Quality control of automated whole slide analysis
US7606779B2 (en) Methods and system for data aggregation of physical samples
KR20120132644A (en) Skin state analyzing method, skin state analyzing device, and recording medium on which skin state analyzing program is recorded
US20080060210A1 (en) Computerized antler scoring system
US20210391042A1 (en) Management system
JP2021177765A (en) Colony detection system
US8504301B2 (en) Sample analyzer, method for displaying analysis result information of a sample and computer program product
WO2024034207A1 (en) Colony counting device, control method, and program
JP6913433B2 (en) Microbial testing equipment, methods and programs
US20070143660A1 (en) System and method for indexing image-based information
US7844088B2 (en) Methods and systems for data analysis and feature recognition including detection of avian influenza virus
FR2771831A1 (en) AUTOMATIC EDITING PROCESS FOR DIGITAL MEDICAL IMAGING UNIT
JP4578135B2 (en) Specimen image display method and specimen image display program
JPH1183726A (en) Examination apparatus
WO2024142424A1 (en) Colony counting device, control method, and program
JP2024024370A (en) Colony counting device, control method and program
JP2024024369A (en) Colony counting device, control method and program
JP2024024371A (en) Colony counting device, control method and program
WO2024142425A1 (en) Colony counting device, control method, and program
JP6500358B2 (en) Colony detection system, colony detection method, and program
JP2024093417A (en) Colony counting device, control method, and program
JP2024093418A (en) Colony counting device
JP4785347B2 (en) Specimen image display method and specimen image display program
JP2019049516A (en) Clinical examination device and system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23852192

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1